CHAIN OF ATTACK A STAR TREK NOVEL [042-042-5.0]

By Gene Deweese

Synopsis

While mapping a series of gravitational anomalies, the USS Enterprise is

suddenly hurled millions of light years through space, in to a distant

galaxy of scorched and lifeless worlds... into the middle of an endless

interstellar war.With no way back home, the crippled starship finds

itself under relentless and suicidal attack by both warring fleets! And

captain Kirk must gamble the lives of his crew on his ability to stop a

war that has raged for centuries and ravaged a galaxy...

This book is a work of fiction. Names, characters, places and incidents

are either the product of the author's imagination or are used

fictitiously. Any resemblance to actual events or locales or persons,

living or dead, is entirely coincidental.

An Original Publication of POCKET BOOKS POCKET BOOKS, a division of

Simon & Schuster Inc. 1230 Avenue of the Americas, New York, NY 10020

Copyright 1987 Paramount Pictures. All Rights Reserved.

STAR TREK is a Registered Trademark of Paramount Pictures.

This book is published by Pocket Books, a division of Simon & Schuster

Inc., under exclusive license from Paramount Pictures.

All rights reserved, including the right to reproduce this book or

portions thereof in any form whatsoever. For information address Pocket

Books, 1230 Avenue of the Americas, New York, NY 10020

ISBN 0-671-66658-4

First Pocket Books printing February 1987

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7

POCKET and colophon are registered trademarks of Simon & Schuster Inc.

Printed in the U.S.A.

For Juanira Coulson, whose talent and persistence opened the door for

serendipity.

Introduction

It's been a long time... I first saw Star Trek when Gene Roddenberry

apologetically introduced the two pilot episodes to a few hundred

science fiction fans at the Cleveland World SF Convention a few days

before the first program was broadcast. Subsequently, I watched every

episode that was aired and managed to talk about fifty friends and

strangers into sending protest letters during the first "Save Star Trek"

letter-writing campaign. Over the years, it's gotten ever harder to

resist the temptation to watch the reruns, particularly when they're

showing gems like the Gary Seven episode, "Assignment Earth," and "The

Menagerie." And now-Well , I can only say it's been great fun these last

few weeks, finally having an excuse to indulge myself in an episode a

day, ostensibly for "research," and getting paid for it to boot.

The sale of this book without its cover is unauthorized. If you

purchased this book without a cover, you should be aware that It was

reported to the publisher as unsold and destroyed." Neither the author

nor the publisher has received payment for the sale of this "stripped

book.

Chapter One

ACCORDING TO EVEN the most conservative estimates, the Milky Way galaxy

contains more than one hundred billion stars, and there are at least

that many other galaxies beyond our own, beyond the reach even of warp

drive. This means that for every human alive on earth at the end of the

twentieth century there are twenty or more stars in our home galaxy

alone, and countless billions more are spread throughout the clusters

and superclusters of other galaxies, stretching to the very edge of the

universe--if, indeed, an edge exists. It is therefore little wonder

that, even with Federation, Romulan, and Klingon ships spreading

throughout space at unprecedented rates, more than ninety-nine percent

of even that one galaxy is unknown and untouched by human---or Romulan

or Klingon--sensor probe. Even within the territory covered by the

Federation Exploration Treaty, the unknown far outweighs the known as

scout ships leap-frog over thousands of star systems in their rush to

explore, to reach new horizons. Under such circumstances, then, it is

easy to go where no man has gone before. It is, in fact, often

unavoidable. To survive such explorations and to return safely--that is

another matter altogether.

"I fail to see the humor in the situation, Dr. McCoy." As always,

Spock's remark held neither anger nor resentment. It was simply a

statement of fact, edged with the faint touch of bemused bafflement that

was always present when the Vulcan science officer was dealing with

less-than-logical humans. "I know, Spock, I know," McCoy said, stepping

back to give Spock ample room as the Vulcan's long, powerful fingers

continued to methodically work the science station controls. "But you

don't mind if we humans indulge in a good laugh now and then, do you?"

"Of course I do not mind," Spock said, most of his attention still

devoted to analyzing the station's readouts for some sign of the probe

that had been launched more than five minutes before. It was rapidly

becoming apparent, however, that the probe was not going to reappear,

either five parsecs away or five hundred, all -of which struck McCoy as

a fitting and somewhat amusing climax to the totally erratic behavior of

the previous forty-odd probes. "In fact, Doctor," Spock went on, still

not taking his eyes from his instruments, "as you yourself have pointed

out, such outbursts often seem to have a therapeutic effect on your

species. It would hardly be logical for me to wish to deny you something

that could improve your physical and mental well-being and hence your

efficiency in performing your duties." McCoy chuckled, still watching

the display screens over Spock's shoulder. "Maybe it's just as well you

don't ever laugh, Spock. You're already too blasted efficient. I'd hate

to see what would happen if you ever developed a sense of humor. Jim and

I and half the crew would only be excess baggage." "Another example of

human humor, I assume, Doctor. I find it difficult to believe that even

you would look favorably on inefficiency. But if I may be allowed tO" A

shudder rippled through the Enterprise, momentarily shifting the deck

beneath their feet. Spock, rock steady despite the movement, called up a

dozen new displays on the screens. "Another shift in field strength,

Captain," he said,

"an increase of twenty-seven-point-one-six percent. I would suggest

drawing back approximately ten A.U. as a precautionary measure." "Take

us back ten A.U., Mr. Sulu, warp factor three," Kirk said without

hesitation. He had long since learned not to question his first

officer's suggestions. "Hold steady at that position." "Done, sir," the

helmsman said, his fingers already entering the commands into his

console. McCoy, silent now as he gripped the padded hand-rail to steady

himself, turned toward Kirk. Seated in the command chair, the captain

was intent on the forward viewscreen, where the flowing ribbon of the

Sagittarius arm of the galaxy overlay the distant turbulence of the

Shapley Center. As they watched, the star field rippled briefly, much as

the bridge itself had seemed to ripple a moment before. "Another change

in the field strength, Mr. Spock, or just the result of our motion in

the field?" "Our motion, Captain, with respect to the irregularities

near the anomaly itself. The field remains steady at its new level."

"And the last probe, the one whose disappearance Dr. McCoy found so

amusing--still no sign of it?" "None, Captain." "A malfunction in the

probe itself, perhaps?" "Unlikely, Captain. As you know, the probes are

little more than powerful subspace beacons attached to impulse engines.

Considering the simplicity of their design and construction, the

likelihood of any vital component failing has been statistically

established to be less than one in one-point-three million." "But it is

possible," Kirk persisted. "Possible, yes, Captain, in the same sense

that anything, no matter how unlikely, is statistically possible."

"Point taken. What other explanations can you suggest?" "The most likely

is that the probe is beyond the range at which it can be detected."

Kirk swung his chair to look directly at the science officer. "Out of

range, Mr. Spock? I was given to understand that their signals could be

picked up at a range of more than five thousand parsecs." "Five thousand

four hundred eighty, to be precise, Captain, though that is, of course,

only the minimum guaranteed range." "You're saying this--this

'gravitational anomaly' could have transported the probe more than five

thousand parsecs?" "Obviously, Captain." "But none of the other probes

has reappeared at any distance greater than five hundred parsecs."

"Affirmative, Captain." "That's it, Spock? No elaboration?" "If you

wish, Captain. As you and Dr. McCoy are certainly aware, we have been

unable to establish any logical pattern based on the behavior of the

probes sent through the so-called anomalies. Some have not been affected

at all, as if for them the anomalies do not exist. Others have vanished

and emerged into normal space little more than one parsec distant, while

still others have reappeared nearly five hundred parsecs away in a

totally different direction. There is therefore no logical reason to

assume that the range is limited in any way. The distance a probe is

transported is apparently not related in any way to its entry velocity.

It is more likely a result of the geometry of space itself and the

manner in which it is distorted by these so-called anomalies, and that

distortion appears to vary randomly from moment to moment, even to cease

entirely on occasion." "From your repeated use of the phrase 'so-called

anomalies,Chr(34)+ can I assume that your observations have suggested a

more useful or more accurate term?" "Not at all, Captain. It is only

that I am beginning to doubt that these objects are indeed something as

simple as anomalies resulting from surrounding areas of gravitational

turbulence." "What, then?"

"I do not know, Captain." "But you must have some thoughts on the

subject, Spock." "Of cours e, Captain." "And those thoughts are... ?"

Kirk prompted. "I can only say, Captain, that there is a distinct but

unquantifiable possibility that they are not natural phenomena at all."

In the silence that followed, all eyes on the bridge turned to Spock.

Then a short burst of laughter came from McCoy. "An unquantifiable

possibility?" McCoy said, shaking his head in mock surprise. "That isn't

your Vulcan way of saying you have a hunch, is it, Spock?" "It is hardly

a hunch, as you chose to call it, Doctor. It is merely that the results

of our observations so far appear totally random and therefore

illogical. Past experience has led me to conclude that phenomena which

appear to be illogical are less often the result of natural laws than

they are the result of manipulation of those laws by intelligent but

less-than-logical beings." Captain James T. Kirk suppressed a smile as

he nodded and shifted to a more comfortable position in the command

chair. The thought that the anomalies were not natural phenomena had, of

course, occurred to him, but, as Spock would say, he had not assigned it

a high probability factor. For one thing, when the Enterprise had first

run into one of the anomalies--run into it quite literally--the ship had

been instantaneously transported more than three hundred parsecs and

damaged by the effects of the surrounding turbulence. Under those

conditions, everyone's priorities had centered on survival, both their

own and the Enterprise's, leaing little time for scientific analysis or

philosophizing. But now it was a different matter. Equipped with newly

designed sensors that allowed them to precisely locate--and avoid--the

strangely complex turbulence, and supplied with more than two hundred

probes, they had come to study what was apparently a cluster of

such anomalies discovered by a scout ship not long after the

Enterprise's return from the Mercanian system, where the first anomaly

had deposited them so unexpectedly. Or, more accurately, they had come

to study a cluster of gravitationally turbulent areas in order to

determine if any or all of those areas contained at their centers the

same type of anomaly that had swallowed the Enterprise and then spit it

out three hundred parsecs away. By sending the probes through such

anomalies, they had hoped to determine just where the anomalies led.

Anomalies had indeed been found in the centers of seven of the areas of

turbulence so far, and forty-eight probes had been dispatched. Six had

passed through the anomalies without effect, emerging on the far side

with no indication of damage or change of any kind. Forty-one had

reappeared at distances ranging from one to five hundred parsecs, in

directions that bore no discernible correlation to anything. Two probes

sent through the same anomaly within milliseconds of each other

reappeared more than six hundred parsecs apart, one in the direction of

the Shapley Center, the other in the general direction of Klingon

territory. In short, as Spock had said, the operation of the so-called

anomalies appeared totally illogical and had thus far defied analysis.

And now one of the probes had simply vanished, either transported beyond

the five-thousand-parsec range of its transmitter or destroyed. or...

"Could the disappearance be related to the shift in the field strength,

Mr. Spock? The two occurrences were fairly close together." "It is

possible, of course, Captain. Without further data, however, there is no

way of confirming or denying the hypothesis." "Another probe, then, Mr.

Spock?" The hiss of the doors to the turbolift forestalled Spock's

reply. A stocky man in his fifties, his tightly curling hair beginning

to gray, strode onto the bridge.

His angry glower, as much as his green civilian tunic, distinguished him

from the Enterprise personnel. "What sort of nonsense have you been up

to now, Kirk?" the man snapped, making the omission of the captain's

rank sound more like an insult than an oversight. "Welcome to the

bridge, Dr. Crandall," Kirk said dryly. "What seems to be the problem?"

"The problem, Kirk, is that I was awakened only moments ago by something

which, were I on a planetary surface, I would describe as an earthquake.

I would like to know the cause, and I would like to know why it was not

avoided, whatever it was." Kirk turned away from Crandall toward the

science officer's station. "You have the floor, Mr. Spock." A minuscule

arching of one upward-slanting eyebrow was the only change of expression

as Spock turned to face Crandall. "The cause, Dr. Crandall, was an

unpredicted and abrupt change in both the overall strength and the

pattern of the gravitational field surrounding the so-called anomaly we

are currently observing. The reason it was not avoided is that it was

unpredicted. To the best of our knowledge at this time, such changes

cannot be predicted." Crandall, still not fully accustomed to the

Vulcan's calm and rational ways, seemed to lose some of his steam. "I

see," he said. "But the ship--the ship was not damaged?" "Not a bit,"

Kirk assured him. "As you know, the new sensors allow us to--" "I know,

I know," Crandall snapped. Then he glanced around the bridge, his eyes

settling on the forward viewscreen. "There's an anomaly out there? A new

one?" "That's right," Kirk said. "The seventh." "Why wasn't I called? I

am, after all, an official observer, which would seem to me to mean that

I should be present during all observations."

"If you will recall, Dr. Crandall Kirk said quietly, "midway through our

observations of the previous anomaly, you told us you didn't want to be

bothered unless something unusual happened. "Something downright

spectacular,Chr(34)+ I believe were your exact words." "Something that

can rattle the walls of a Constitution-class starship qualifies as

spectacular in my book, Kirk. In any event, now that I am here, would

anyone care to bring me up to date?" "Of course, Doctor," Kirk said,

turning away again. "Mr. Spock?" "Very well, Captain," Spock said and

then began a probe-by-probe account, complete with all particulars, of

all observations since Crandall's hasty departure on the previous day's

watch. Kirk settled back to listen and to wonder once again what

Starfleet Command had had in mind when they had allowed Dr. Jason

Crandall to be attached to the Enterprise as an "official observer."

True, Crandall had been in charge of the Starfleet-supported civilian

labs that had developed the sensors that had been installed on the

Enterprise, but Crandall himself, despite a doctorate in physics, was

far more of a politician than a scientist. Otherwise he would never have

been in charge of that or any other lab, Kirk was sure. And it had

become abundantly clear after only a few days on the Enterprise that

Crandall saw the labs--and this mission involving the sensors developed

there--primarily as stepping stones to greater things, perhaps even to a

seat on the Federation Science Council. Kirk shuddered mentally at the

thought. He did not naively believe that Council seats were attained

purely on merit, but neither could he believe that merit and ability had

no bearing at all on the matter. All current members were, at the very

least, competent, some even brilliant, and the thought of Crandall

bluffing or conning his way into their company was growing more

disturbing each time Kirk had contact with the man.

"All right, Spock, all right!" Crandall's harsh voice' cut into Kirk's

thoughts. "I don't need the trajectory and serial number of every probe!

All I wanted was a brief summary. Have you or have you not discovered

any pattern?" "Negative, Doctor." "And do you foresee any such

discovery?" The Vulcan's eyebrows arched again, not quite as minutely as

before, and his eyes flickered toward Kirk for an instant. It was, Kirk

realized, as close to exasperation as he had seen Spock express in some

time. "It is impossible to foresee a discovery in the sense you seem to

mean,.Doctor," Spock said. "If, on the other hand, you wish to know if I

expect such a discovery to be made, then I can only say that I have

every confidence that, in time, it will be made." "But not here and now?

Not in the next few hours or even in the next few days or weeks?"

"Again, Doctor, that is impossible to say." "Good Lord, man! I'm not

asking for an oath signed in blood! All I'm asking is if you think

you'll be able to get to the bottom of this before you run out of

probes!" "With no more data than I have at present, it would be

illogical to form an opinion one way or the other, Doctor." McCoy, who

had moved away from the science station during the exchange, stifled a

laugh and, when Kirk glanced at him, could only shake his head. He was

obviously enjoying Crandall's frustration, all the more because he

himself had so often collided with Spock's implacable wall of logic.

Then, abruptly, another shudder rippled through the Enterprise, not as

powerful as the first but enough to send both of Crandall's hands

clutching at the padded railing. "What--" he began, but before he could

get a second word out, Spock was checking his instruments and reporting.

"The field strength has decreased to zero, Captain." "It's gone, Spock?

The area of turbulence has disappeared?" "Precisely, Captain." "And the

so-called anomaly at its center?" "Unknown, Captain. I would suggest

dispatching another probe." Kirk considered a moment before turning to

face the viewscreen again. "Take us back to within probe range, Mr.

Sulu. Warp factor two." "Warp factor two, sir." "Any indication of

renewed turbulence, Mr. Spock?" Kirk asked, his own eyes fastened to the

forward viewscreen. "None, Captain." Finally they were once more within

one hundred thousand kilometers of the anomaly, and Spock's fingers were

moving unerringly across the controls of the auxiliary panel that was

linked to the probes. As before, the probe would be beamed to within

five thousand kilometers of the anomaly using the cargo transporter.

From that point, it would proceed under its own impulse power into the

anomaly. Even so, several minutes went by before Spock looked up from

the controls. "The so-called anomaly has vanished, too, Captain." "And

what does that mean, Spock?" Crandall cut in. During the seemingly

interminable wait, he had alternately stood and paced, fidgeting and

frowning impatiently all the while. "It means precisely what I said,

Doctor," Spock said. "The anomaly associated with this particular area

of gravitational turbulence appears to have vanished at the same time as

the turbulence itself." "What about the others? There are a dozen others

nearby, aren't there?" "There were fifteen in all, Doctor. There is no

way of knowing their status without traveling to the vicinity of each

and checking."

"Well, what are you waiting for?" Crandall demanded. "Captain?" "Your

opinion, Mr. Spock?" Kirk asked. "It would seem logical to check at

least one of those we have already visited, Captain, to see if the

disappearance is limited to this one anomaly." Crandall heaved a sigh of

annoyed relief. "And if it's gone, too, then I assume we will be heading

back to the Federation. It seems to me, considering the total lack of

useful results obtained so far, we have wasted quite enough time on this

project. Kirk?" "As you have said, Dr. Crandall, you are an observer,"

Kirk said, his tone nearly as neutral and precise as Spock's. Then,

turning back to the forward viewscreen "Lay in a course that will take

us to all six previously visited anomalies, Mr. Sulu. And Mr. Spock,

keep an eye on those new instruments. We don't want another unscheduled

trip." "Of course, Captain," Spock said, and a moment later Sulu

acknowledged that the requested course had been laid in. "Cautiously,

then, Mr. Sulu. Warp factor two." "Warp factor two, Captain." On the

forward viewscreen, the distant Shapley Center slid to one side and

vanished as the Enterprise turned and aligned itself for its new

destination. In a few seconds, only the scattered stars of the outer

edge of the Sagittarius arm of the galaxy could be seen, and beyond them

the faint band of light that was the Orion arm, one tiny patch of which

held all the stars within the Federation. "How long will this--this

exercise in futility take, Kirk?" Crandall snapped, a new level of

hostility evident in his voice. "The original observations were

scheduled to take three standard weeks." "But if there's nothing left to

observe--" "Then perhaps it will take somewhat less time." "Perhaps?

Good Lord, man, do you mean to say--"

"I mean only to say," Kirk cut in, "that this disappearance merely

deepens the mystery surrounding the nature of these anomalies, and that

I can see no reason to cut short our mission until we have learned all

that we possibly can." "Commendable scientific curiosity, I am sure,

Kirk, but rather pointless, it seems to me. In any event, I postponed

important business to become a part of this mission, and I strenuously

object to having it prolonged unreasonably. That is to say, beyond a

point at which useful knowledge can be obtained. A point which, I might

add, appears to have been reached some time ago." "You are, of course,

free to contact Starfleet Command at any time, Doctor. Lieutenant Uhura

will be glad to open a channel whenever you wish." Crandall's square

features hardened as his jaw muscles tensed, and Kirk imagined he could

hear the grinding of teeth. Then Crandall slumped slightly, confirming

Kirk's suspicions that friendship with the people at Starfleet Command

was not the reason Crandall was aboard. He or his political friends had

pulled strings somewhere, and Starfleet Command had obliged, as they

often did in small matters that did not interfere with Starfleet

activities. The string pulling had gotten him aboard the Enterprise, in

a position to take advantage of any significant discoveries that

resulted from the use of his lab's sensors, but that was all it had

gotten him. And even that might be lost if he pushed his luck. "I may do

that, Kirk," Crandall said. "If this nonsense continues much longer, I

may do just that." But both men knew it was an empty threat. Kirk

remained silent, and finally Crandall turned to leave the bridge. But as

he took a step forward toward the turbolift, another shudder gripped the

Enterprise. Compared to the two previous incidents, it was almost

unnoticeable, not even enough to cause Crandall to miss a step. A moment

later, however, Chekov's voice, high

pitched with excitement, sliced through the air. "The screen, sir!

Look!" Kirk spun the command chair instantly to face the viewscreen. He

blinked, and fingers of ice suddenly gripped his spine. Instead of the

sparse stars of the edge of the Sagittarius arm, there were stars by the

thousands, by the tens of thousands, a star field immeasurably brighter

and more dense than anyone on the bridge had ever seen.

Chapter Two

"FULL STOP, MR. SULU," Kirk snapped. "Maintain present position. Mr.

Chekov, determine precisely our present position with respect to the

point at which we first appeared in this sector." The helmsman and the

navigator responded instantly, their fingers working the controls even

as they acknowledged the commands. "Spock, full sensor scan." "No

vessels in sensor range, Captain. Radiation, though markedly higher,

presents no danger." "Kirk!" Crandall's strident voice overrode everyone

else's. "Would someone please tell me what the blazes is going on!"

"We'!! tell you as soon as we find out ourselves. Spock, any idea where

we are?" "Not yet, Captain. There is--" "Kirk! I demand to know--" "Dr.

Crandall, please leave the bridge. Return to your quarters." "Now see

here, Kirk! Who do you think you are? I am, in effect, a representative

of the Council itself, and I demand civil answers to my questions "We do

not have time for your demands at the moment, Dr. Crandall," Kirk said

sharply, punching a button on the command chair arm as he spoke.

"Security detail to the bridge immediately. Escort Dr. Crandall to his

quarters." Crandall's face reddened, and he turned abruptly to

the communications station. "Lieutenant, open a channel to Starfleet

Command! At once " Uhura looked questioningly at Captain Kirk. "Continue

monitoring all frequencies, Lieutenant," he said. "Attempt no

communications with Starfleet Command or anyone else at this time."

"Kirk, I'll have your head for this! If you don't--" The turbolift doors

hissed open, disgorging a two-person security detail. "Escort Dr.

Crandall to his quarters," Kirk said, confirming his order. "Make sure

he stays there. I'll inform you when he is to be allowed to leave."

Crandall resisted for a moment, but then, blustering a final threat, he

allowed himself to be propelled into the turbolift. "As you were saying,

Mr. Spock?" Kirk asked, turning back to the science officer. "Yes,

Captain. There is an area that appears to be the Shapley Center directly

ahead, though the computer has not yet positively identified it. If it

is indeed the Shapley Center, we have been transported at least five

thousand parsecs." "Five thousand?" "Affirmative, Captain. We are

approximately five thousand parsecs closer to this object than we were

to the Shapley Center. Of course, if it is not the Shapley Center, then

we could well have traveled much farther." Kirk was silent a moment

before turning back to the screen. "Mr. Chekov, have you located

our---our point of entry into the sector of space?" "I believe so, sir."

"Very well. Mr. Sulu, take us to within a half-A.U. and hold there. Warp

factor two." Again the view on the forward screen shifted, but now it

was as if the Enterprise were turning within a heavy curtain of stars.

In every direction, the brightness and density were the same. "Mr.

Spock, prepare to launch a probe directly at our point of entry."

"Prepared, Captain." "Launch the probe, Mr. Spock." "It is being

transported... now, Captain." "And while we're waiting for the results,

Mr. Spock, see if you can find out where we are." Spock turned again to

the data displays. "The computer has been performing a more detailed

analysis of the radiation profile of the object that appeared similar to

the Shapley Center," he said, pausing to study a set of readouts more

closely. "There appear to be a number of basic differences in the

spectrum," he added. "Could the differences be accounted for by the time

difference? We are, after all, more than fifteen thousand light-years

closer." "Negative, Captain. Certain of the readings indicate precisely

the opposite. The spectrum indicates that the central black hole, for

example, is less massive than that of the Shapley Center by a factor of

nearly ten, not marginally more massive, as would be the case had we

come five thousand parsecs closer. And there are other, independent

indications that argue against this object's being the Shapley Center."

"And those are, Mr. Spock?" Kirk prompted when Spock paused to scan a

new set of readings. "The computer has also been scanning for

recognizable extragalactic objects since we arrived, Captain. Few

external galaxies are visible from within this cluster of stars, but

among those few, it has found none that it can positively identify."

"What you're saying, then, Mr. Spock," Kirk said after three or four

seconds of silence, "is that, first, we are no longer in the Milky Way

galaxy. And second, the computer has not been able to determine what

galaxy we are in." "Precisely, Captain." Though no one did more than

glance at Spock and the captain for a fraction of a second, the bridge

was suddenly totally silent except for the ever-present hums and beeps

of the equipment and the ship itself. There was no panic, no wild

questions or howls of

disbelief. Instead, after allowing only a moment to' inwardly

acknowledge Spock's confirmation of what they had already begun to

suspect, everyone concentrated all the harder on his or her instruments,

knowing that such concentration and the ability to react instantly and

effectively could very well be, as it had been so often before, the key

to their survival. "I don't suppose," Kirk said after a good thirty

seconds of silence, "that the missing probe is somewhere in this

neighborhood, too." "It has not been detected, Captain." "Any theories,

Mr. Spock?" "Only the obvious one, Captain. Despite the sensors' failure

to detect the characteristic gravitational turbulence, the Enterprise'

has passed through one of the so-called anomalies." Kirk nodded. "I'd

assumed as much. How does this affect your hunch, your unquantifiable

possibility?" "I would say it raises it to the level of a probability,

Captain, although it remains unquantifiable." Spock paused, his eyes on

the data displays. "The new probe is approaching our point of entry."

Another pause, and then "It has passed through our point of entry and

has vanished from our sensors." "And still no indication of

gravitational turbulence?" "None, Captain." "What are the odds that if

we follow the probe we'll end up back where we started?" "Unknown,

Captain. I would say, however, that whatever the odds may be, they are

better than for any other method of return." "I realize that,. Spock.

Even if we were no farther away than the Andromeda galaxy, and even if

the Enterprise could maintain warp eight indefinitely, we would still be

several lifetimes away from the Federation." "Precisely, Captain. As I

see it, logic gives us no choice but to make the attempt."

"Agreed. Objections, anyone? Bones? Sulu? Uhura? Chekov?" No one spoke.

"Very well. Mr. Sulu, do your best to duplicate our flight path in

reverse. Warp factor two, I believe it was." "Correct, sir. Ready to

execute on your command." "Execute." The starbow resulting from

achieving relativistic velocity was always spectacular, but never more

so than here in this massive concentration of stars. Even so, it went

virtually unnoticed as all eyes waited for the sudden alteration in the

star field that would indicate they were back in Treaty territory. But

the change didn't come. "Time, Mr. Spock?" "We passed through the entry

point two-point-seven seconds ago, Captain." "Then why--Mr. Chekov, how

close were we to retracing our original flight path?" "Maximum error of

two hundred kilometers, Kep-tin." "Spock, could the anomaly have been

smaller than that? Could we simply have missed it?" "Anything is

possible, Captain. Since the seven for which we have observational data

were all greater than five thousand kilometers in diameter, however, it

seems unlikely." "As you say, anything is possible. Mr. Sulu, take us

back. Again." They tried five more times, and each time the failure of

the star field to change was greeted by a deeper silence. They even

launched a series of probes, but, unlike the first, not a one vanished

or even so much as flickered. Then someone laughed. It was Ensign

Rostofski, one of the newest members of the crew. By coincidence a

friend of Chekov's family, Rostofski manned the environmental station

but seemed to spend much

of his off-duty time trying to convince Chekov that he could lose his

accent if only he would really try. "Something amusing, Ensign?" the

captain asked quietly. "Not really, sir. I was just thinking what Dr.

Crandall was going to say when he finds out." Kirk found himself

smiling, but then, with a shake of his head, his expression sobered. He

turned again to Spock. "Theories, Mr. Spock? Where did the

anomaly--so-called anomaly--go?" "Unknown, Captain. It could be

anywhere. It may have gone out of existence entirely. Without the

gravitational turbulence normally associated with them, there is no way

of detecting them." "And our chances of locating it again?" "Also

unknown, Captain. There is no data on which to base such a calculation.

I should also point out that, even if we are successful in locating it,

there is no guarantee that it would return us to our starting point."

"But it is our only chance." "The only chance of which we are currently

aware, Captain." "I stand corrected." Abruptly Kirk pressed the button

that connected him to engineering. "Mr. Scott, to the bridge." "Aye,

Captain, in a minute. One o' the transporter circuits needs a wee bit

"Now, Mr. Scott." A brief pause, perhaps half a second, and then "Aye,

Captain, I'm on my way." Kirk stood up and moved to the science station,

looking at the flickering displays that, though often meaningless to

him, seemed sometimes a physical extension of Spock's mind, so quickly

could the Vulcan call up the needed data and interpret it. "What about

Crandall, Jim?" McCoy asked, joining the other two.

Kirk sighed briefly. "Later, Bones. When you have a sedative ready for

him." The turbolift doors hissed open, and Chief Engineer Montgomery

Scott emerged onto the bridge, lurching to a halt as his eyes fell on

the fog of stars that filled the forward viewscreen. Kirk quickly

outlined the situation and then asked, "Is everything in top shape,

Scotty? Our little jaunt hasn't knocked any bolts loose this time?"

"None that I know of, Captain. The transporter circuit that was needin'

adjustment, that was no' the fault o' what you say happened to us just

now." "Very well, gentlemen, I'm open to suggestions, any suggestions.

Mr. Spock? A few minutes ago you said something to the effect that the

possibility that these so-called anomalies were something other than

natural phenomena had been enhanced by our recent encounter. Would you

care to elaborate?" "Of course, Captain, though I feel obliged to point

out again that the possibility, though enhanced, is still

unquantifiable, as is nearly everything we have thus far encountered in

connection with these phenomena." "Understood, Spock. Go on." "Very

well, Captain. First, if we assume that the phenomena were deliberately

created by sentient beings, then we must assume they had a purpose in

creating them. Second, the most obvious purpose, considering the one

property these phenomena share, would be to serve as a form of

transportation." "Logical enough, Spock," McCoy said, "but I thought you

said these things were just plain illogical, which was why you thought

they were artificial in the first place." "Correct, Doctor, but allow me

to continue. If we assume their purpose to be transportation, then two

further assumptions logically follow. First, despite what we have so far

observed, there would have to be some form of consistency designed into

them. And second, they should be easily approachable, not concealed at

the center of a maze of gravitational turbulence that is capable of

tearing a starship to pieces." "Unless," Kirk interjected, "they were

meant to be hidden. If the Federation had something like this, something

we could use to transport Federation ships instantaneously to, say,

someplace in the middle of the Klingon Empire, then the one thing we

would do is hide it and make it as difficult as possible for anyone

other than ourselves to approach or leave." "True, Captain, but that

requires the additional assumption that these anomalies were created

solely for warlike purposes. I would hope that the creators of devices

as sophisticated as these, apparently constructed of pure energy, would

be beyond such illogical behavior." Kirk smiled faintly. "Many humans

thought the same thing about warp drive before we met the Romulans and

the Klingons. But go ahead, Mr. Spock." "Thank you, Captain. You will

remember that, with one exception, the probes transported by the other

anomalies reappeared at distances no greater than five hundred parsecs,

the average being ninety-eight-point-three-seven. The Enterprise, on the

other hand, appears to have been transported at least several million

parsecs through an anomaly that apparently possessed no trace of

surrounding gravitational turbulence." "So, Spock?" McCoy said

impatiently. "What are you leading up to?" "I am leading up to a

conclusion, Doctor, the conclusion being that those seven anomalies,

with their attendant turbulence, may have simply been erratic and

malfunctioning versions of the one that brought us here. The

gravitational turbulence, in other words, is perhaps not the cause of

the anomalies but the result of their faulty operation. Leakage, if you

will. If they do indeed operate by distorting space itself--as does the

warp drive in a much simpler and more limited way-- that distortion

would in all probability manifest itself as gravitational disturbances.

Remember that according to certain theories all gravitation is the

result of

distortion of the space-time continuum by the masses of the bodies

producing the gravitation." McCoy blinked. "Spock, much as I hate to say

this, I think you've got something." He turned to Kirk. "Like

automobiles, Jim. You know, those infernal internal combustion surface

vehicles they used back in the twentieth and twenty-first centuries.

When they were new and were operating at peak efficiency, they were fast

and quiet. The later models didn't even pollute their surroundings all

that much. But if they were neglected, they turned noisy and unreliable,

and they poured all kinds of garbage into the air, dangerous garbage.

There was a time when doctors could get rich just treating the ailments

that resulted from them." "Aye, Captain," Scott added. "I recall readin'

about those wee monsters when I was a lad in school. It's hard to

believe, but their engines could no' be run in enclosed spaces for fear

o' poisonin' the operator." "Precisely, gentlemen," Spock said. "The

analogy is quite apt." "Interesting, gentlemen," Kirk said, "but I doubt

that these his torical sidelights help us in our present situation.

Unless you're suggesting that the creators of these--these

'gates,Chr(34)+ for want of a better term, are still in existence and

that we may be able to locate them more easily than their missing

creation." "Considering that we have no instruments capable of detecting

the gate, as you call it, Captain, and that we have no information that

would indicate even a general area in which to search, then a search for

those hypothetical creators would indeed seem the most likely avenue to

pursue." "As usual, Spock, your logic is unassailable," Kirk said, then

looked at the others in turn. "Well, gentlemen? Any other theories?

Suggestions? Any ideas for a more profitable way to spend our time?"

When neither Scott nor McCoy replied, except to shake their heads, Kirk

continued. "Very well, gentlemen, that's it, then. Mr. Scott, you and

Spock determine which of the nearer stars are most likely to have

habitable planets. Mr. Chekov, Mr. Sulu, plot a course that will take us

to the nearest half-dozen. And, of course, everyone maintain a

continuous lookout for other craft and for any indication of areas of

gravitational turbulence. And finally, Scotty, give me five minutes,

andthen explain our situation to the crew." "Aye, Captain, but why the

delay?" "To give Dr. McCoy and myself time to break the news personally

to our official observer, Dr. Crandall." The chief engineer grimaced and

nodded. "I dinna envy you the task." When Kirk and McCoy approached

Crandall's stateroom, however, it appeared the task might not be as

difficult as they had anticipated. According to the two security men at

the door, Crandall had calmed down considerably by the time they had

finished escorting him to his room, and they hadn't heard a sound from

him since. Entering, they saw he was seated at his desk, quietly

dictating some notes into his personal recorder. He even smiled when he

looked up and saw them. "Captain Kirk," he said, using the designation

of rank for the first time, "I feel I must apologize for my

unprofessional behavior on the bridge. You were, I fear, quite correct

to eject me as you did. Let me assure you, I fully understand your

position." Standing up now, Crandall offered a beefy hand to Kirk. With

an almost unnoticeable sideward flick of his eyes toward McCoy, Kirk

took the hand briefly. "I'm glad you don't bear a grudge, Dr. Crandall."

"Of course not. You were only doing what you thought best. And I have to

admit, I did let my emotions run away with me for a moment. But tell me,

what is our status? I take it that, since you are away from the bridge,

the situation is not as serious as it might first have appeared. And

that you have been able to pinpoint our location?" "In answer to your

last question, while we have

hardly pinpointed our location, we do have a better idea than before of

just how far we've traveled," Kirk said. "Good, good, I knew you and

your people would come through. Tell me, just how far have we gone?"

Kirk hesitated, knowing that Crandal!'s shell of seeming calm wouldn't

last. "We appear," he said, "to be farther from the Federation than we

at first thought." Crandall's smile faded. His brow wrinkled in the

beginnings of a frown, and his eyes darted from Kirk to McCoy and back.

"And?" he prompted. "Just how far is farther than we thought? A hundred

parsecs? Five hundred? What?" "A minimum of several million, Doctor. The

Enterprise has been transported several million parsecs." The color

literally drained from Crandal!'s previously ruddy face. McCoy stepped

forward to support him in case he started to fall, but Crandall caught

himself and leaned back against the desk. "Several million? Surely

that's impossible!" "I wish it were, Doctor, I truly wish it were. But

it obviously isn't, because that's precisely what happened." He nodded

at the intercom on the stateroom wall. "Mr. Scott will be giving

everyone the details in a few seconds." "But howmwhat happened? I

thought you said these---these anomalies could only throw us a few

hundred parsecs I" He blinked. "And the detectors my labs built--why in

God's name weren't you using them? Why did you blunder into---" "We were

using them, Doctor. The anomaly that took us here apparently had no

attendant turbulence." "Butre" "It's a long story, Doctor," Kirk cut in.

"I suggest you listen to Mr. Scott, and if you have any questions when

he's finished, we'll answer them as best we can." Crandall looked as if

he were going to continue protesting, but then the chief engineer's

voice, the tension of the situation accentuating its Scottish burr,

crackled over the intercom. Still pale, Crandall dropped into the chair

behind the stateroom's trapezoidal desk and listened. When Scott had

finished, Crandall was even paler. "He's saying we're trapped here!

Isn't he? Isn't that what he's saying?" "We appear to be, at least for

the moment," Kirk said, adding, after another glance at McCoy, "but

we've been in what appeared to be worse situations than this before, and

we've always managed to come out of them all right." "But there's always

a first time, isn't there, Kirk? Isn't there?" For a moment, it looked

as if Crandall were going to rise and grasp at Kirk's throat, but then

he slumped back. He waved a hand in a limply dismis-sive gesture. "Go

on, get out of here, you incompetent fools!" His voice was as weak as

the gesture, but still it was filled with anger. "Just get out and leave

me alone I" McCoy stiffened and started to speak, but Kirk put a

restraining hand on his arm. "Very well, Dr. Cran-dall," he said

quietly. "If there's anything you need..." Crandali only snorted

derisively and slumped lower in his chair. Kirk, his hand still on

McCoy's arm, turned and stepped into the corridor. As the door hissed

shut behind them, he said, "Stick around here a few minutes, Bones, just

in case. If he goes off the deep end, I'd sooner one of your sedatives

calmed him down than a phaser on stun." "After the way he talked, I'm

not so sure," McCoy snapped. "He had no rightre" "You know better than

that, Bones. Look at it from his viewpoint. He's a lot worse off then we

are." McCoy frowned, shaking his head. "Come on, Jim! What's that

supposed to mean? We're all in the same boat, literally." "No, Bones,

we're not. Many of our friends are

here on the Enterprise with us. Virtually the entire four hundred and

thirty men and women aboard are, in some ways, an extended family, even

the dozen or so new ensigns on their first mission. But Crandall's

family and friends, his entire world, is millions of light-years away. A

lifetime away, Bones. A large part of ours is right here with us."

McCoy's scowl faded. "All right, Jim. I understand. I'll--" "Captain

Kirk, to the bridge!" Scott's voice crackled over the intercom. Kirk

slapped the button on the nearest corridor intercom. "On my way, Scotty.

Kirk out," he snapped, then turned back to McCoy for an instant.

"Remember, Bones, whether we like Crandall or not, he's going to need

more help than any of the rest of US." Then he was loping down the

corridor to the turbo-lift. Seconds later he stepped onto the bridge.

"What is it, Mr. Scott?" he asked even before the doors hissed shut

behind him. Scott, standing and vacating the command chair, pointed at

the viewscreen. "We've picked up some-thin', Captain, I canna be sure

what." His eyes on the screen, Kirk settled into the command chair. The

object on the screen, a hexagonal cylinder, was turning slowly, not

about the axis of the cylinder but not quite end over end either.

"Details, Mr. Spock." "Mass approximately one hundred thousand

kilograms. Range approximately fifty thousand kilometers. No life forms

indicated on board, and it is not under power." "A derelict?" "Perhaps,

Captain. There is, however, an operating power source on board, and a

primitive sensor field surrounds it, maximum range of ten thousand

kilometers." "Mr. Chekov, can you determine its point of origin?"

"No, sir. It is moving less than one hundred kilometers per second, and

its flight path does not intersect any star within two parsecs." "To

travel that distance at that speed, Captain," Spock volunteered, "would

have taken twenty thousand standard years. Additionally, there is no

indication that the object contains a propulsion system, either impulse

or warp drive." "Could it be a beacon of some sort, Mr. Spock? One that

has gone dead for one reason or another? A warning beacon, perhaps?" "It

is possible, Captain." Kirk nodded thoughtfully. "Any signs of

gravitational turbulence in the object's vicinity?" "Negative, Captain.

I take it, however, that you are suggesting a possible connection

between this object and the missing gate?" "Not suggesting as much as

hoping, Spock. I was thinking in terms of lighthouses and rocky coasts,

actually. Or, more optimistically, navigation markers." "A possibility,

Captain, but a remote one, considering the apparent instability of the

gates." I know, Spock, but it's worth looking into." "Of course,

Captain." "Very well. Mr. Sulu, impulse power. Take us in to ten

thousand kilometers." "Impulse power, sir." As the Enterprise moved

forward, the object grew on the screen. Soon, blemishes began to appear

on its surface, discolorations that might have come from age or

radiation or both. Here and there, openings appeared, some jagged, some

smooth, as if designed into the object. None was larger than a meter in

diameter. "There are remnants of a second power source, Captain," Spock

said as he studied his sensor readings. "Primitive hydrogen fusion, if I

am interpreting the residual readings correctly." "And the one still

operating?" Spock made a small adjustment to a control. "

antimatter, Captain, though of comparatively low power and very low

efficiency. And it would appear to be unshielded." "Unshi elded? By

design or the result of damage?" "Impossible to tell, Captain. But it is

operating, which would indicate that any damage to the antimatter core

itself is minimal." "How close is it safe to approach?" "With our

deflector shields up, Captain, no limit. Otherwise, I would recommend

maintaining a minimum separation of one hundred kilometers." "Ten

thousand kilometers, Captain," Sulu reported. "Holding position on

impulse power." "Anything else in sensor range, Mr. Spock?" "Nothing,

Captain." Kirk studied the screen another moment, and then "Take us in

another thousand kilometers, Mr. Sulu." "Aye-aye, sir." "The power usage

within the object is increasing, Captain," Spock said, not looking up

from his instruments. "I would say that it has detected our presence."

As the science officer spoke, the image on the forward screen began to

slow its tumbling motion. "All stop, Mr. Sulu," Kirk snapped. "Let's see

what it's up to before we move any closer." "Power usage still

increasing, Captain," Spock reported. "And the object's sensor beams are

strengthening. They are being brought to a focus on the Enterprise." On

the screen, the tumbling continued to slow. One end of the hexagonal

cylinder was now pointing in the general direction of the Enterprise. It

could not seem to eliminate a small, circular wobble, however. "Extreme

power buildup, Captain," Spock announced. "Deflector screens up, Mr.

Sulu," Kirk ordered. "Deflector screens up, sir." A moment later a

concentrated beam of light lanced

out of one of the openings on the end of the cylinder. "Laser discharge,

Captain," Spock said calmly. "It appears to be attacking us." "So I

noticed. Analysis, Mr. Spock." "Primitive laser weapon, Captain, similar

to early Federation equipment, but more powerful and longer range than

anything the Federation ever produced. It is much less effective, of

course, than phasers of the same power. Also, unless the object can

stabilize itself further, the discharge will not touch the Enterprise."

"Any other weapons indicated?" "None operational, Captain, though there

appear to be a number of fusion devices in addition to the

malfunctioning power source. They could be weapons, but if so, their

propulsion systems are inoperative." "Can the laser be disabled without

destroying the object?" "Since the object has no deflector screens,

Captain, I would estimate that a phaser burst of approximately

three-point-eight milliseconds would accomplish that objective." "Mr.

Sulu, lock phasers on target." "Locked on, sir." Frowning, Kirk

hesitated. On the screen, the object suddenly lost what little stability

it had displayed and began tumbling end over end, the laser beam

flailing even more wildly through space than before. "Indication of

further malfunction, Captain," Spock said, speaking rapidly. "The output

of the power source is increasing exponentially. Overload and consequent

instantaneous conversion to energy of all anti-matter will occur--"

Spock's voice cut off as the forward viewscreen erupted in a flash of

light. The Enterprise, though safe behind its deflector screens,

shuddered before the massive release of raw energy. "--occurred

five-point-nine seconds ago," Spock concluded when the deck had steadied

once again. "Damage report," Kirk snapped. "Engineering."

"Momentary overload to deflector screen circuits, sir, but no apparent

permanent damage," came the voice of MacPherson, Scott's chief

assistant. "Tell him I'm on me'way, Captain," the chief engineer called

over his shoulder as the turbolift doors hissed open and he stepped in.

"Just ta be on the safe side." Kirk complied as he listened to the other

sections report in, slowly relaxing as it became apparent that, aside

from a brief shakeup, the explosion had produced no lasting consequences

anywhere on the Enterprise.

Chapter Three

In HIS STATEROOM, Dr. Jason Crandall still sat in the chair where Kirk

and McCoy had left him minutes before, but now, instead of slumping in

despair, he sat bolt upright, his fingers white-knuckled as he gripped

the edge of the desk and waited for the next tremor to rumble through

the ship. What now? his mind screamed in silent fury and terror. What in

God's name are they doing to me now? He started to rise to his feet, but

the trembling in his knees stopped him, and he dropped back into the

chair, letting despair grip him once again. Whatever was happening, it

didn't really matter what he did. He was beyond help. Several lifetimes,

that brainless captain had said! Several lifetimes at maximum warp

factor to get back to the Federation and earth! And even that was

possible only if, by some miracle, they managed to find out where earth

was! The only bright spot, he thought bitterly, was that, with any luck,

he wouldn't last out the decade. As far as his friends and family--for

once in his life, he was glad that he had not married--he was as good as

dead right this minute. Dead and buried in a four-hundred-man,

warp-drive coffin several lifetimes away from everyone and everything he

knew. Everything and everyone that meant anything to him. Not that he

had had many intimate friends, but at least he had known people,

hundreds of them. They had been

familiar, often friendly faces, not like these four hundred hostile

strangers. More importantly, he had had a career that was, finally,

getting back on track. He had been in charge of Technipower Labs for

over a year, and don't think he hadn't had to scramble and bluff and

grovel to get that post. After the Tajarhi fiasco, even though it had

been entirely the fault of those grasping, never-give-an-inch

negotiators on both sides, he had begun to fear he would never get

another responsible post anywhere in the Federation. But finally, with a

slight assist from a skeleton-filled closet or two, he had gotten a

halfway decent post. He would have been on his way back up the ladder if

it had paid off the way it should have. If it had paid off... Crandall

pulled in a deep breath and shook his head. If he hadn't been so worried

that this might be his last chance, if he hadn't been so greedy for one

more boost up the ladder, he would still be back on earth, only now

beginning to wonder what might have happened to the ship that had been

fitted with Technipower's new gravity turbulence sensors. The loss,

which his enemies would doubtless blame on the inadequacy of those

sensors, would have been bad, but at least he would have had a chance to

recover. More work on the sensors, possibly another mission with another

ship--a ship with a more capable, more cautious crew--and he might have

been on his way up again. Maybe not all the way to the Council, not at

sixty-plus, but on his way up nonetheless. But he had insisted on going

along, accompanying the sensors. "Observing." He had called in a few

favors, rattled a couple more skeletons, and he had gotten on board the

Enterprise, knowing that if the mission were a success the publicity

would open new doors to him, perhaps even boost him over the heads of

those same functionaries he had had to beg favors of in order to get on

the Enterprise in the first place. He had insisted on going along, and

now it was all

over. His whole life was over, to all intents and purposes. And to make

matters worse, these peoplemthis Kirk and the rest--they enjoyed what

was happening! He had seen it in their faces, heard it in their voices

as the orders and responses darted around the bridge. There had been no

fear there, only eagerness and anticipation. To them it was nothing more

than a game! Another "adventure!" What did they care if they never got

back to the Federation? Their lives were here, wherever this blasted

ship took them, and the farther it took them, the better they liked it!

It had been plain from the moment he had stepped on board that they had

little liking or sympathy for Jason Crandall or anyone else outside

their own insular ranks. Their looks and their tones, alternately

hostile and condescending, had demonstrated that beyond any doubt. And

that obvious dislike had fed upon itself. Crandall's own impatience and

anger had grown ever stronger as it became ever more clear that the

mission itself was a failure. From the very start, the data had

obviously been worthless, but when he had finally pointed it out and

tried to get them to cut the mission short, he had been ignored. The

military mind was simply not flexible enough to appreciate the

situation. They had been ordered to investigate fifteen anomalies, and

they would by God investigate fifteen anomalies even though it was

obvious after only a few days that it was pointless to continue. But

even that blind obedience was preferable to what was happening now, now

that they had their freedom from those orders, freedom from Starfleet

Command and the Council. They were like children being let out of

school. They were ready to play their dangerous games, heedless of the

consequences. The fact that they were playing, in effect, on a totally

unknown playing field, where no one knew the rules of the game or even

the nature of the other players, didn't seem to phase them. They could

all be killed--he

could be killed---in an instant, and it didn't concern them in the

slightest! Crandall shuddered, remembering the barely suppressed glee he

had sensed beneath the chief engineer's seemingly matter-of-fact tone as

he had explained their situation over the intercom. And suddenly he

wondered---could the disappearance of the gate be a sham? Could it still

be there? Could it be that they--Kirk and the rest of his wild-eyed

adventurers on the bridge--simply didn't want to return to the

Federation yet? Could they have cooked up this terrifying story to

justify themselves in his eyes? And in the eyes of the crew, at least

some of whom must have more sense? Or could the gate itself be a hoax?

All he had seen for himself was the viewscreen with its mass of stars,

and that could certainly have been faked by anyone on the bridge,

particularly that treacherous Vulcan. Beyond that, he had only Kirk's

word for what had happened. The fact that the officers backed up their

captain meant nothing. For a moment, hope surged through Crandall, but

it faded almost as quickly as it had come. He could not bring himself to

believe that even they could be so totally irresponsible. Pulling in a

deep breath, he slowly pushed himself to his feet. His legs were again

steady, he found, at least steady enough to get him around without

falling. He moved deliberately to the door, wondering if he would be

allowed back on the bridge yet. And wondering what good it would do him

if he were.

Once it was confirmed that the Enterprise had indeed suffered no damage

as a result of the cylinder's destruction, detailed observations of the

sector of space in which the Enterprise found itself quickly got

underway. First, the visual impression of the extreme density of the

stellar population was confirmed. With stars generally separated by less

than one light-year, the entire Federation would have fit into less than

fifty cubic parsecs. There was also a certain uniformity that had not

been encountered in any previously known sector of space. There were

virtually no extremely old or extremely young stars. The majority were

also class G,-not vastly different from Sol, and all were prime

candidates, statistically speaking, for having families of planets.

There were no solidly based theories about how such a cluster, which

appeared to extend several hundred parsecs in all directions, could have

come about. What generated the most discussion during those first hours,

however, was Ensign Chekov's suggestion that there might be a link

between the cluster and the gates, or at least between the cluster and

the gravitational turbulence associated with many of the gates. Assuming

even a moderately dense mass of primordial nebular material, the

gravitational turbulence of the gates would be more than enough to

trigger the formation of far more stars than would come into existence

otherwise. Chekov's idea, however, raised more questions than it

answered. For one thing, the gates would have to have been in existence

billions of years ago, when these stars were formed, which meant that if

they were indeed artificial as Spock had suggested, their creators were

almost certainly long gone and hence would be of little help to the

Enterprise. For another thing, despite the fact that the Enterprise had

been deposited here by a gate, there was no evidence now either of that

gate or of any of the lesser, "malfunctioning" gates. All of those

apparently were back in the Milky Way galaxy, in a sector where star

population was, if anything, sparser than average. There was also the

rather obvious paradox that if the gravitational turbulence had indeed

triggered the formation of the stars, the stars would have formed around

the gates, which, if still functioning, would have bled off the

infalling matter, thereby preventing the formation of the stars the

turbulence had triggered in the first place.

Still, the idea was intriguing, and, because of the discussions it

generated, it kept a lot of minds occupied that might otherwise have

tended to brood about their seemingly hopeless situation. The only

person it affected badly was Dr. Crandall, who saw it only as making his

situation all the worse. But, then, from the moment Crandall had

returned to the bridge, it had been apparent that anything unexpected or

unfamiliar affected Crandall badly--and that included virtually

everything in this unknown sector of space. Despite everyone's best

efforts to be understanding and sympathetic and even optimistic about

finding a way back to Federation space, Crandall's despair and anger

only seemed to grow greater. And when he learned that the Enterprise was

not going to continue to hold its position near where the gate had

originally existed but was going to "go exploring," he exploded. "My

God, Kirk!" he shouted, his face paling. "If that gate is going to

reappear, it's going to reappear here, not fifty parsecs away! Can't you

at least wait a few more days before taking off on this wild goose

chase?" "In the first place," Kirk pointed out with deliberate calm,

"there is no evidence suggesting that the gate is going to reappear here

as opposed to anywhere else. For all we know, it hasn't disappeared at

all. It may have simply moved, or possibly it's flickering on and off,

the way some of the ones we were originally investigating apparently

did. In the second place, none of the systems we will be visiting in

this first foray is more than a standard day away at even moderate warp

speeds. And if we don't find anything on this first leg of our 'wild

goose chase,Chr(34)+ we'll return here to check. As we will continue to

do if future legs become necessary. With the density of stars in this

sector, we could visit a new system every day for months and still not

be more than a standard week away." But Crandall would not be pacified.

"And what happens when you run into another of those--those

booby traps?" he almost screamed. "One that's a little more advanced? We

could all be vaporized and never even know what hit us!" And so it had

gone. In the end, Crandall had stormed off the bridge, red-faced and

trembling. McCoy-had followed, offering Crandall first a sedative and

then some of the well-aged Scotch he had been saving since his last

birthday, but Crandall stiffly and angrily refused everything. He was

still in his stateroom the next day when the Enterprise dropped to

sublight velocity twenty A.U. out from the first star on the list. It

was virtually a twin to Sol, its diameter a few thousand kilometers

greater, its surface temperature a few hundred degrees higher. It even

had a scattering of sunspots, a phenomenon that had turned out to be

relatively rare among suns with habitable planets, though no one had yet

advanced an acceptable theory to account for that rarity. One planet,

roughly earth-sized, was well within the zone in which terrestrial life

could exist. It was one of seven planets, including the almost

inevitable gas giants and a tiny ball of frozen methane at eighteen A.U.

Their first discovery, as they held their position on the fringe of the

system, was the hulk of what had once been an observation satellite

thousands or tens of thousands of years ago, still orbiting the

outermost planet. That, however, was the only indication of life they

found. As far as they could tell from that distance, there were no other

artificial satellites anywhere in the system, no ships of any kind, and

no detectable communications activity in either the electromagnetic or

subspace spectra. It appeared to be, despite the remains of the

observation satellite, a dead system, and as Kirk ordered the Enterprise

forward, the feeling began to take hold that they were slowly easing

their way across the threshold of a mausoleum. Chief Engineer Scott

seemed the most affected despite

his protests that he was "no' a superstitious mon," but there was no one

on the bridge who didn't share the feeling to some small degree. Even

Spock admitted that he expected the worst, though he insisted his

expectation was only a logical deduction based on the observations they

had already made. Finally, after a four-hour sublight approach, the

Enterprise was in standard orbit about the earthlike planet. As

expected--or feared--the sensors still showed no evidence of life. There

was, however, ample evidence of death. What remained of an atmosphere

was a veritable sea of radioactivity, and the surface was like the

surface of earth's moon or Mercury, pitted by thousands of craters. But

these craters were not caused by meteorites or volcanos but by an almost

inconceivable bombardment of fusion bombs. Even the oceans had been

sterilized of life, boiled away by the heat of destruction and turned

into a radioactive soup as they recondensed and settled into the old

seabeds and the countless craters. For several seconds no one on the

bridge made a sound. They could only watch as the ghastly images flowed

silently across the viewscreen. McCoy's teeth were clenched as he

gripped one of the padded rails, and when he finally spoke, his voice

was hushed with a kind of terrible awe. "My God, Jim! What kind of

creatures could be capable of something like that? Even the Klingons .

." His voice trailed away as he shook his head and wiped briefly at his

eyes. "How long ago, Spock?" Kirk asked after another protracted

silence. Spock, whose eyes, like everyone else's, had been riveted on

the screen, turned abruptly back to his instruments, his Vulcan training

clamping down on the emotion that struggled to emerge from the human

half of his heritage. "Impossible to say precisely, Captain, without

detailed information on the number and nature of the

weapons used. Assuming .the use of devices similar to those on board the

object the Enterprise encountered earlier, I would estimate

approximately eleven thousand standard years has passed since this

bombardment took place, with a possible error of plus or minus three

thousand." Spock's numbers and his carefully maintained matter-of-fact

tone seemed to restore some measure of objectivity to the others, though

McCoy still looked as grim-faced as before. "Is there any chance the

planet's inhabitants could have done this to themselves, Spock?" Kirk

asked softly. "Two factions fighting each other for control of the

planet?" "Possible but extremely unlikely, Captain. Both combatants

would have to have been totally irrational and suicidal. Less than one

percent of the weapons used here would have been sufficient to

effectively destroy all life outside the oc eans, and anyone capable of

launching such weapons would certainly have been aware of that fact. No,

Captain, this amount of destruction and this amount of residual

radiation are almost certainly the result of an attack by a fleet of

spacecraft, an attack that was designed to do precisely what it

did--destroy all life on the planet and ensure that the planet itself

would be uninhabitable by any life forms for hundreds of thousands of

years. Based on an analysis of the elements that are producing most of

the radioactivity, it would, in fact, appear that most of the

radioactivity is not the direct result of the fusion explosions

themselves but the result of the materials in which the weapons were

housed. "Clean' fusion weapons, as I believe your ancestors called them,

Captain, can destroy a world but allow life forms to return safely in a

relatively short time. These weapons, however, would appear to have been

deliberately designed to be as 'dirty' as it is possible to make them."

McCoy shuddered. "What kind of madhouse have we fallen into, Jim?" "I

don't know, Bones. But at least all this happened

a long time ago. There's nothing to indicate that the ones responsible

for this are still around." "And nothing to indicate they aren't,

either," McCoy said, his eyes flickering apprehensively at the sheer

savagery of the destruction still visible on the viewscreen. "And if

they were capable of this thousands of years ago, what kind of weapons

do you imagine they've developed by now?"

Chapter Four

ON THE COURSE the Enterprise followed to the next system, two more of

the "booby traps" were found, both still partially functional. Once the

nature of the objects was determined, both were destroyed by phaser

fire, thereby preventing the fusion weapons aboard from detonating and

flooding nearby space with the kind of radioactivity the first had left

behind when its antimatter fuel had exploded. In the system itself, two

once habitable worlds had been destroyed just as thoroughly as the world

in the first system. Whether the worlds in both systems had been

destroyed by the same enemy or they had destroyed each other was

impossible to say. Spock's sensors could only indicate that the

destruction in the second system had occurred somewhere during roughly

the same six-thousand-year period they had indicated for the first

system. In the third system, there were no habitable worlds and hence no

destruction. In the fourth, there was one habitable world. It, too, had

had life scoured from its surface, but in a different, less permanent

.way. Here, it appeared that space-borne lasers had been used. There was

no radioactivity, and life survived in the oceans. On the land, some

plant life survived as well, and, except for the lack of any animal life

larger than insects and except for deserts that had been turned to

glass, certain areas looked pleasantly pastoral. The time of the

destruction

, Spock estimated, was also different--in the

twenty-to-thirty-thousand-year range. In two more systems, no habitable

worlds were found. In another, antimatter missiles had apparently been

used less than five thousand years ago. In another, there was

two-thousand-year-old evidence that massive phasers had been the agent

of destruction, along with weapons similar to the photon torpedoes the

Enterprise carried. In yet another, there was the residue of a deadly,

corrosive chemical gas that had blanketed an entire planet, still

present after at least thirty-five thousand years. And in still another,

a world destroyed by the same hellish radioactive weapons that had

obliterated the first two was still hideously barren after more than

forty thousand years. Between systems, more than a dozen of the

spacego-ing booby traps were found and destroyed. On only one planet in

all the systems they visited on that first leg of exploration was there

anything that didn't fit the pattern of total destruction. The planet

itself, dead for at least thirty-five thousand years, was no different

from a half-dozen others. All plant and animal life was gone from the

land, devoured by enough antimatter missiles to do the job a hundred

times over. Deep beneath the surface, however, apparently beyond even

the reach of the radiation that still poisoned space for a thousand

kilometers around, Spock's sensors detected an operating anti-matter

power source. More than five kilometers below the surface, small amounts

of power were being produced and used, and at the same point there were

peculiar and extremely low-level life readings. "Fascinating, Captain,"

Spock said after nearly two minutes of steady concentration on the

readouts. "I have never encountered anything quite like it." "Artificial

life, perhaps?" Kirk suggested. "Negative, Captain, at least no type of

artificial life I am familiar with." "Don't forget, this is another part

of the universe. Who knows what could have been created here?"

"Granted, Captain. But this reading is not only different but...

diffuse. In some ways it appears to be a single being, and yet it is

not." Spock paused, looking again at the readouts. "I apologize,

Captain," he continued after a moment, "that I must express myself so

iraprecisely. It is a most disturbing feeling to suspect a pattern

exists and yet to be unable to define that pattern or even to describe

logically why I suspect its existence." "It's called intuition," McCoy

said, but without the grin that would normally have accompanied the

remark. Here, in a universe of seemingly endless death, smiles had been

rare. "It's from your mother's side of the family, that's all." "Perhaps

you are right, Doctor," Spock said, without the argument or the arched

eyebrow that, like McCoy's missing mischievous grin, would normally have

been a part of their byplay. "An organic computer, then," Kirk said.

"Remember, the Federation experimented with them for a time before

Duotronics came along." "I have considered that possibility, Captain. I

have also considered the possibility that the readings are the result of

distortion caused by the intervening mass of rock or even the radiation.

Neither theory, however, has proven satisfactory." "At least," McCoy

said, "whatever it is isn't shooting at us the way those booby traps

did." "And no sensor probes have been detected," Kirk added. "And

Uhura's found no indication of subspace activity of any kind. My own

guess is that, whatever it is, it was put out of commission when the

surface of the planet was destroyed, and that was at least thirty-five

thousand years ago. In any event, it is obviously not the builder of the

gate, and I can see no way of learning more without beaming someone

down--through five kilometers of solid rock and a thousand kilometers of

radiation--to look." Spock stared at the readouts another few seconds

and then straightened. "You are correct, Captain.

Such a risk would be illogical simply to satisfy one's curiosity."

After two standard weeks and twenty-seven planetary systems without

finding anything more advanced than insects anywhere outside the oceans,

even McCoy was becoming inured to the seemingly endless destruction. His

eyes began, like everyone's, to glaze over with each new scene of

devastation. Finally, as the twenty-seventh system fell astern, Kirk

ordered a new course laid in, and they returned to their starting point.

There was, however, no indication that the gate had reappeared, and

after half a day, despite Dr. Crandall's strenuous objections, they

resumed their explorations. Now, however, instead of spiraling slowly

outward, the Enterprise struck out radially, putting as much distance as

possible between itself and their starting point. And instead of

stopping at every system that might hold a habitable world, they

leapfrogged over ten for every one they investigated. For the first

fourteen days, nothing changed. Destruction was everywhere, and everyone

was beginning to wonder if every habitable world in this entire cluster

had been destroyed. But then, on the fifteenth day, more than thirty

parsecs out, as the Enterprise dropped to sublight velocity to take

detailed readings on yet another planetary system, the routine they had

fallen into was abruptly shattered. Spock, studying his instruments as

always, was the first to spot the new intruder. "Captain," he announced,

"sensors indicate approaching craft." Kirk, who had been concentrating

on the magnified image of the planet they had dropped out of warp drive

to inspect, looked around sharply. "Another booby trap?" "I do not think

so, Captain. It is moving under its own power, and there are indications

it is capable of warp speed."

"Bearing, Mr. ChekovT' "Three-seventy-five, mark twenty-three, sir."

"Mr. Sulu, get that on the screen, maximum magnification." "Aye-aye,

sir." As the helmsman spoke, the planet vanished abruptly from the

screen, replaced by yet another view of the impossibly dense star field.

After an instant of hesitation, the view expanded, the countless stars

spreading outward and shooting off the edges of the screen. Finally,

near the center, something nonluminous appeared in the star field, and

soon its seven-sided shape was fuzzily evident. "Details, Mr. Spock."

"Mass approximately thirty million kilograms. Heavy shielding indicated.

Range one-hundred-seven-teen-point-six-million kilometers, moving at

point-two-three-five-c on a heading that will, at its closest point,

bring the craft within thirteen-point-two-million kilometers of our

present location. Preliminary indications are that the craft is

technologically comparable to early Federation cruisers of the Cochrane

or Verne class. There are only five life forms aboard, however." "Any

sign that they're aware of our presence?" "None, Captain. No sensor

beams detected as yet. The probability is that we are well beyond the

range of its sensory apparatus." "You mentioned shielding. What about

weapons?" "Unknown, Captain, but based on the type of shields detected,

lasers are the most likely. Their shields would present no resistance to

phaser fire." "Estimated time of closest approach?"

"Twenty-seven-point-nine minutes, Captain." "Lieutenant Uhura, any

indication of subspace radio activity?" "None, sir." "Is it possible

they don't have subspace radio capability, Mr. Spock?" "Possible,

Captain, but unlikely since they appear to have warp drive. It is more

likely that they are

simply not broadcasting. From the amount and type of shielding they

carry, they would appear to be intentionally trying to avoid letting

their presence be known. To another craft of the same technological

level, without sensors similar to ours, they would be virtually

undetectable beyond direct visual range." "Then they could be

listening?" "Of course, Captain." "Is it possible that this ship could

be related to the destruction we've seen?" "Impossible to say, Captain,

but if by 'related' you imply responsibility, I would think it unlikely

for a number of reasons ." Kirk nodded, sighing. "I know. Most of these

worlds were destroyed thousands or tens of thousands of years ago, so no

ship we come across now could possibly have had any part in whatever

happened that long ago. And one would expect whoever was responsible for

that destruction to have come up with an even more sophisticated and

destructive technology in the interim, while this ship appears more

primitive." "Precisely, Captain." "Then who are they? Mr. Chekov, does

their flight path, fore or aft, intersect any nearby star system?" "No,

sir. Except for the one we are both in right now." Kirk paused, studying

the seven-sided dot on the screen as if trying to force it to yield its

secrets by simple concentration. Finally he said, "Lieutenant Uhura, see

if you can get any response." "Right away, sir." Her lithe fingers

stabbed at the controls as she spoke. "Sensor beams, Captain," Spock

announced. "However, though we can detect the beams themselves, it is

unlikely that the alien craft is able to gain any useful information

from them. We are still well beyond their effective range, probably

indistinguishable from background noise." "Subspace radio transmission,

sir," Uhura said, "but nothing intelligible. And it's already stopped."

"Let the computer have it, Lieutenant. Maybe it' can make something out

of it." "Analysis in progress," she said, "but it doesn't look hopeful."

She paused, listening. "There is a pattern, though, Captain. It could be

an identification code of some kind. A challenge to us, perhaps."

"Apparently they heard us, at least," Kirk mused. "And they obviously

have subspace radio and sensor capability. Let's get a little closer,

Mr. Sulu. Lay in an intercept course and proceed on impulse power,

deflector shields up." "Laid in, sir, and deflectors up." "Lieutenant

Uhura, continue broadcasting and monitoring all subspace frequencies."

"Yes, sir." "Any change, Mr. Spock?" "None, Captain. Their course and

speed remain unchanged, and their sensor beams continue to operate. No

further subspace emissions." On the screen, the alien ship was no longer

simply a dot, and the relatively primitive nature of the ship was

becoming ever more apparent. A single, massive warp-drive engine mounted

behind a much smaller, blunt-nosed pyramid that apparently contained the

living quarters reminded Kirk of the probes the Enterprise had been

using to investigate the anomalies. The craft was purely utilitarian,

and it was little wonder that there were only five crew members aboard.

"What would you estimate the range of their sensors to be, Mr. Spock?"

"Based on their intensity, they should be at least marginally effective

at our present range." "In all likelihood, then, they know not only that

we exist but where we are," Kirk said thoughtfully. "Affirmative,

Captain." "But except for the sensor beams and that one subspace

emission, they're ignoring us." Kirk paused, frowning at the craft as it

continued to expand on the viewscreen. "Or, more likely, pretending to

ignore us. All stop, Mr. Sulu. Let them come to us."

"All stop, sir." "And Lieutenant Uhura, cease broadcasting but maintain

surveillance of all frequencies." "Yes, sir." Shields up, the EnterPrise

waited. As the alien, stolidly maintaining its original course, closed

to within five million kilometers, Spock said, "Definitely laser

weaponry, Captain. It is detectable through their shields at this range.

Sixty-three seconds to closest approach, now estimated to be

three-hundred-twenty-seven-point-six-thousand kilometers." "Our own

deflector screens can handle anything they can put out, I assume." "Of

course, Captain." They continued to wait and listen, but the approaching

ship remained totally silent. At two million kilometers, Kirk ordered

Uhura to resume transmitting. Still there was no response. At just over

five hundred thousand kilometers, the alien emitted a single

concentrated burst of nondirectional subspace radio energy. A split

second later, it changed course abruptly and began accelerating.

"Collision course, Captain," Spock said. "At present acceleration,

impact in seven-point-three seconds. Lasers preparing to fire." "Evasive

maneuvers, Mr. Sulu." Almost instantly, the Enterprise leaped ahead on

impulse power, but not before the alien craft's lasers fired at what, in

space, was the equivalent of point-blank range. A moment later, the

alien's drive proved itself far closer to being truly inertialess than

any comparable early Federation starship's had ever been. In a matter of

seconds, the craft came to a virtual halt, reversed its course almost as

quickly as the Enterprise itself could have done, and put itself once

again on a collision course. Sulu and the navigation computer responded,

and the alien ship shot by a hundred kilometers below, its lasers still

drenching the Enterprise's shields and surrounding space in concentrated

radiation.

"They apparently do not like us, Captain," Chekov commented.

"Apparently," Kirk agreed. "If this is the way everyone in this

neighborhood reacts to strangers, it's no wonder all these worlds were

destroyed." "They are persistent, too, sir. The ship is returning

again." Again the alien craft was on a collision course, and again it

was firing its lasers steadily, putting out prodigious amounts of

energy. Though they were no more advanced than early Federation weapons,

they far surpassed them in sheer brute force. Again the Enterprise,

under Sulu's sure hand, avoided the alien, and the Enterprise's

deflector screens absorbed the coruscating laser energy without damage.

"How long can they keep this up, Spock?" Kirk asked as the alien

executed yet another U-turn and began yet another blazing run at the

Enterprise. "Not more than another five-point-four minutes, I would

estimate, Captain. No laser device can continue to produce that level of

power for long without beginning to seriously malfunction. In addition,

the repeated rapid course changes appear to be straining not only the

craft's primary power source but the structure of the craft itself."

"Very well. When their weapons become inoperative, perhaps we'll be able

to talk." As Kirk spoke, Sulu once again took the Enterprise safely out

of the path of the charging alien craft. This time, however, the alien

did not immediately turn and resume its attack. Instead, it paused and

emitted another concentrated burst of subspace radio energy. "Anything

intelligible this time, Lieutenant Uhura?" "Nothing, Captain. But these

last two transmissions were much more complex than the first. They were

obviously nothing as simple as an identification code or a challenge.

The computer indicates that both transmissions contained massive amounts

of information,

compressed into periods of less than forty-three milliseconds." "They're

telling their friends about us?" Kirk wondered aloud. "It is a distinct

possibility, Captain," Spock said. "Perhaps they will be less

belligerent." "They well have to be, sir," Chekov said, shaking his head

in annoyed disbelief as he watched his instruments. "This one is coming

back again I" "But this will be its last run, Captain," Spock said. "It

appears to be purposely inducing an overload in its primary power

source. Unless something is done, all its matter and antimatter fuel

will be simultaneously converted to energy in eighteen-point-three

seconds, which time will coincide with its closest approach to the

Enterprise. If that approach is as close as previous approaches, our

deflector shields will not be able to withstand the energy release."

Chapter Five

"WARP SPEED, MR. SULU, now!" Kirk snapped, even before Spock had

finished speaking. Acknowledging the command only by his actions, Sulu

stabbed at the controls, and the Enterprise surged ahead, warp drive

engaged within seconds. In another second, the relativistic starbow in

the viewscreen was replaced by the computer-generated star field and the

now slightly off-center alien craft. "Destruction of alien craft no

longer imminent, Captain," Spock said. "The overload sequence has

apparently been aborted!" "A bluff?" Kirk wondered aloud, relieved but

not yet relaxing. "Or perhaps they were only simulating an overload.

Possible, Mr. Spock?" "Possible but unlikely, Captain. The power drain

was real and of massive proportions. Obviously, however, it was under

their control at all times, and they were able to cut it off within

seconds of the Enterprise's departure." "So, the danger of an explosion

was real, but the alien's actions could still have been a bluff."

"Again, possible but unlikely. For the alien to undertake such an

action, it would have to assume that we were continually monitoring the

craft's internal workings and were aware of the impending explosio n. The

technological level of their own equipment would not allow such

monitoring." "Therefore," Kirk finished when Spock paused,

"they weren't bluffing. They intended to commit suicide in hopes of

taking us with them." "Almost certainly, Captain." "And yet, when the

Enterprise warped out of range, they were able to remove the overload

and stabilize their engines in a matter of seconds." "In

three-point-four seconds, Captain." "Such proficiency would seem to

indicate that they have done that sort of thing before." "Very likely,

Captain." "Which would indicate any number of possibilities. For

example, just because their own technology doesn't allow them to monitor

the internal workings of other spacecraft doesn't mean that they aren't

accustomed to meeting ships like ours that can monitor such things.

Meeting and attacking." Kirk grimaced. "Any progress in analyzing those

subspace bursts, Lieutenant Uhura?" "The computer has been working on

it," she said, studying one of the small screens in front of her. "Most

of it is still unintelligible, but part of it appears to be a crude

image of the Enterprise. There are several accompanying symbols that

might specify a scale for the image. Perhaps Mr. Spock can make more

sense out of them." "So they were telling their friends about us." Kirk

looked back at the image on the screen, once again vanishingly small

among the stars. "Are we out of range of their sensors, Mr. Spock?"

"Affirmative, Captain." "All stop, Mr. Sulu. Let's watch and see what

happens." He paused, glancing around the bridge. "Unless someone has a

better idea. Now that we appear to have a breather, I'm open to

suggestions, gentlemen." "The course you suggest seems eminently

logical, Captain," Spock said when no one else volunteered anything.

Then, his full attention back on his instruments, he announced, "The

alien craft is in motion,

accelerating away from us. It will--it has just achieved warp speed and

is continuing to accelerate." "Don't lose them," Kirk snapped. "Mr.

Sulu, keep us within sensor range---our sensor range, not theirs."

"Aye-aye, sir." "They are at warp two-point-five and holding, Captain.

That appears to be their maximum speed." "Antimatter drive, but without

dilithium crystals to focus the power?" "Apparently, Captain." "And

their heading--I don't suppose they're aiming for any particular star?"

"None within a dozen parsecs. Nor does their present course bear any

discernible relationship to the course they were initially following."

Frowning, Kirk settled back in the command chair. Where were the aliens

going? Did they think the Enterprise had simply run away, or did they

suspect they were being followed? And if they did suspect it, were they,

like a bird defending its nest, trying to lure the intruder away from

their home world? Was that why its course was not aimed at any of the

thousands of relatively nearby stars but at the empty space that

separated them? Or, he wondered, could they be hoping to lead the

Enterprise into a trap? Now that it was clear they could not destroy the

Federation ship on their own, not even with their kamikaze maneuver, did

they hope that whoever had been on the receiving end of those subspace

radio bursts could do the job?

Dr. Jason Crandall lay fully dressed on his bed, futilely trying to

decide which was worse---the terrifying nightmare from which he had just

awakened or the bleak reality that had replaced it. The nightmare, he

thought grimly, had at least come to an end, just as the dozen before it

had done. Its repeated scenes of his own grisly death on one

outlandishly alien world after another had left him bathed

in icy perspiration, but they had ended. What passed for reality, on the

other hand, showed no signs of ending. He was imprisoned on a ship of

hostile strangers a lifetime away from everything and everyone he was

familiar with, and that very real imprisonment, he was now convinced,

could have no end but his own equally real death. He had come to accept

that fact more than a dozen standard days ago, shortly after the

Enterprise had finally and briefly returned to its starting point in

this alien sector of space. Instead of staying and using the remaining

supply of probes in an attempt to locate the gate that had brought them

here, Kirk had almost immediately ordered a resumption of his pointless

search for the remnants of some civilization which, if it had ever

existed at all, had almost certainly been destroyed thousands if not

millions of years ago. Until then, Crandall had often fostered the

forlorn hope that the gate was not truly missing, that its disappearance

had all been a fiction generated by Kirk to give him an excuse to play

the explorer for a few days or weeks more. Even though that hope had

faded further with each new scene of devastation that appeared on the

viewscreens, he had managed to keep it alive throughout those first

days. But then, with one mindless order, Kirk had shattered that hope.

After sending the Enterprise on a half-dozen uneventful runs through the

spot where the gate had once been, he had ordered the search resumed,

this time not limiting it to the nearby stars but moving straight out

through the cluster at a warp factor that he doubted the ship could

safely maintain for any length of time. At that point there had no

longer been any doubt in Crandall's mind that his predicament was real.

Unless the mad captain's pipe dream of finding the so-called gate

civilization came true, the whole lot of them would be destroyed out

here in this interstellar no-man's land. And then, less than five

standard hours ago, Kirk had taken yet another giant step toward that

destruction. The Enterprise had made its first contact with a

spacefaring race in this sector. Not with another of those decaying

relics of past destruction they called booby traps but with an actual

ship, under the control of living, sentient beings. Predictably, the

encounter had been a disaster, even based on the drastically censored

version Crandall and the crew had been given. And, to make matters

worse, Kirk was now intent on playing some insane game of interstellar

cat and mouse. Despite all common sense, he was trailing the retreating

alien, sublimely overconfident that the Enterprise could handle whatever

he was blindly leading it into. A knock on the door of the living

quarters section of Crandall's stateroom snapped him upright on the bed,

his booted feet hitting the carpeted floor with a thud. Pulling in a

deep breath, he sat quietly for a long moment, composing himself. Now

that he had come to accept the depressing fact that the Enterprise was

going to be his home for the rest of his life, he had no intention of

letting his emotions once again get out of hand, as they had in his

earlier, uncontrolled outbursts. Those had done quite enough damage to

his image, making him seem not only impatiently autocratic but, worse,

childishly fearful, even weak. From now on, his personal feelings would

remain just that--personal. Whatever emotions he displayed would be, as

they had been throughout his career in public life, limited to those

that would further his own ends, no more and no less. Standing up, he

smoothed his green tunic and hurriedly wiped the remaining beads of

perspiration from his forehead as he strode past the room divider

between his sleeping quarters and his equally sparsely finished living

quarters. "Enter," he said, and a moment later the door hissed open. A

young ensign, blond with uneasy gray eyes,

stepped hesitantly into the stateroom, casting a nervous glance over her

shoulder as the door closed behind her. Crandall suppressed a frown as

he searched his memory for the ensign's name. Normally, among civilians

and their varied dress and hair styles, he would have no trouble making

the mental associations that would allow him to put a name to any one of

hundreds of people he was introduced to, but here on the Enterprise,

where uniforms and regulations cut individuality to the bone, he felt

lucky to keep the officers and their duties separate in his mind, let

alone the names and functions of the hundreds of others who swarmed the

ship's corridors. He could only remember that this particular ensign had

been one of a group of a dozen or so who had been pointed out to him as

being fresh out of Starfleet Academy, the Enterprise their first

spacegoing assignment. "Yes, Ensign, what can I do for you?" he asked.

"I'm sorry to bother you, Dr. Crandall," she said, obviously having

trouble forcing the words out, "but I felt that I had to speak to you."

Crandall softened his own expression a fraction, suddenly sensing that

in this young woman he might have found his first ally. She was

obviously upset, but equally obviously she was not upset with him but

with something about the Enterprise. "That's perfectly all right,

Ensign. Won't you have a seat?" Motioning her to the lounge chair in the

corner of the stateroom, he sat casually on the edge of the trapezoidal

desk in one corner of the room. "For a start, how about telling me your

name?" "I'm sorry," she said, blushing as she sat down. "My name is

Davis, sir." "No need for the 'sir,Chr(34)+ Miss Davis. I'm just a

civilian, not an officer." "I know, sir, but as a representative of the

Council--" "Only unofficially, as I'm sure you are aware, Ensign,"

he said, letting just a trace of his annoyance with that state of

affairs color his voice. "But tell me, Miss Davis, what is it you wish

to speak to me about?" he continued, arranging his features into a

rueful smile. "Much as I'd like to, I'm afraid getting you---or

myself--shore leave is a bit beyond my current capabilities." A nervous,

answering smile flickered across her softly rounded features. "I realize

that, of course, sir. And I don't want you to think that I'm being

disloyal to the captai n in any way by coming to speak to you." "Of

course not!" he said, giving her a reassuring smile. "In any case," he

added in a confidential tone, "one's ultimate loyalty is to the

Federation itself, not to any one individual. So please, feel free to be

completely open and honest with me. Whatever you say will be just

between us--unless you specifically tell me otherwise." For just a

moment, as he had spoken of loyalty to the Federation as opposed to

loyalty to Kirk, a new kind of tension had flickered across her

expressive features, and he wondered if he had overplayed his hand and

lost her. "Please, go ahead," he said softly. "Why not begin by telling

me about yourself?. How is it that you're on the Enterprise, for

instance? I seem to recall being told that this is your first assignment

out of Starfleet Academy." With those questions, he could see her

visibly relax, and he allowed himself a mental sigh of relief. Then she

was pulling in a deep breath and raising her eyes to meet his. "That's

right, sir. I graduated just three months ago. And I don't know how I

happened to be assigned to the Enterprise. The luck of the draw, I

imagine. Even so, it was quite an honor." "I'm sure it was. The

Enterprise is, after all, a rather highly regarded vessel." She nodded,

a shy smile flickering around her lips

and eyesas memories drove some of her current tensions away. "All my

classmates were green with envy. There wasn't one who didn't want the

chance of serving with Captain Kirk." Suppressing his impulse to laugh

derisively, Crandall nodded his encouragement instead. "But you weren't

counting on anything like this," he suggested. For a moment, she was

totally silent, the faint smile vanishing as she was reminded of the

reasons that had brought her to Crandall. "No, I wasn't," she said, and

suddenly her voice was tight with emotion. "This was supposed to be

strictly a scientific mission! We were supposed to be back on earth in

only a few weeks! My fiance graduated last year, and he's on the

Krieger, and we were both scheduled for duty on the Republic next year.

His family knows Captain Halston, and---" As abruptly as the emotions

had broken free, she clamped down on them, pressing her lips together

into a tense line, blinking back a tear as she averted her eyes in

embarrassment. "I'm sorry," she said. "No need to be," Crandall said,

debating briefly whether or not he should put a comforting hand on her

shoulder. "Graduating from the Academy doesn't mean you have to stop

being human." "Thank you, sir." "You have nothing to thank me for, Miss

Davis. Believe me, I know how you feel. I don't have a fiancee waiting

for me at home, but I do have friends and family." Slowly, she looked up

at him, and he could see in her eyes that, no matter what her training

or her uniform said, he had gained her trust. She was--and with careful

handling would remain---his ally. Favoring her with another smile, this

one a mixture of reassurance and sympathy, he stood up from where he had

been half seated on the corner of the trapezoidal desk and lowered

himself into the other lounge chair. After a moment, he hitched it

forward and turned it a fraction so he was facing her more directly.

Leaning forward but still not reaching out to touch

her, he said, in his best just-between-friends tone, "You said you felt

you had to speak with me, Miss Davis. I hope you haven't changed your

mind." "No, it's just that" "Whatever it is, you can tell me. As I said,

it will go no farther than these walls unless you want it to." "As I

understand it," she said hesitantly, "you're an expert on the

gravitational anomalies the Enterprise was investigating--the anomalies

that--that got us where we are now." "I know a little about them, yes. I

was in charge of the laboratory that developed the detectors the

Enterprise was using." He didn't add that his function had been purely

administrative and that, until the announcement that the Enterprise

would use the detectors on this special mission, he had barely known of

the existence of either the anomalies or the detectors. "I--I understand

that you don't agree with the captain's assessment of our situation,"

she said, "and, well, I would just like to know what you think our

chances are. Based on your knowledge of the anomalies, do you think we

can ever get back to the Federation?" "I rather doubt it," he said

cautiously, letting his eyes flicker upward in the general direction of

the bridge as he added, "at least not under the present command

structure." And then, when she didn't bridle at his implied criticism of

Kirk, he went on, his voice firmer. "As you said, I have my

disagreements with Captain Kirk. In the first place, I strongly suspect

that we are wasting precious time chasing after this mythical gate

civilization that he hopes still exists. What's even more disturbing to

me, however, is the fact that, if I'm to believe what the captain

announced over the intercom a few hours ago, he's begun playing some

kind of cat-and-mouse game with the alien ship that attacked us. To tell

the truth--and here I'm trusting you not to let my words go any

farther--I think the captain's course of action is not only putting us

in unnecessary

danger of another, more serious attack but is virtually destroying what

little chance we do have of getting home." As he spoke, he watched her

eyes, ready to backtrack at the first sign that her Academy-instilled

obedience to rank was staging a comeback, but none came.

"Unfortunately," he went on, "I am in no position to do anything about

it. As the captain has pointed out, I am on board strictly as an

observer, despite my being, in effect, a representative of the

Federation itself " "But there must be something you can do," she said,

some of the restrained emotion escaping once again into her words.

"Captain Kirk would certainly listen to anything you have to say. With

your knowledge of the anomalies..." Her voice trailed off as she saw him

shake his head grimly. "In the first place," he said, "I fear he does

not share your estimate of my knowledge. In the second, starship

captains are not known for their receptiveness to unsolicited advice

from unwelcome civilians. And in his eyes--and in the eyes of his

officers, I'm sure--that is precisely what I am." He gave a minuscule

shrug. "Not that I can fault them for that, of course. Or the rest of

the crew for seeing me in the same light." "I'm sure not everyone feels

that way," she protested. "I certainly don't." "I thank you for your

confidence," he said, allowing just a touch of sarcasm into his tone but

following his words almost immediately with his best apologetic look.

"In any event, there's little either of us can do about the situation

except watch and listen." "Watch and listen? I don't understand." He was

silent a long moment, as if debating whether or not to take her into his

confidence. Finally, he leaned toward her again. "Has it ever occurred

to you," he said conspiratorially, "that the briefing we've all been

given concerning our contact with the alien ship is not the complete

story?"

She shook her head. "I'm sorry, but I still don't understand." "What I'm

saying is, while I'm sure the captain wouldn't lie, I can't help but

fear that there are a few things that he's simply not telling us." He

held up his hand to forestall the protest he saw building in her face.

"Believe me," he went on, "I've often dealt with people in positions of

power, both military and nonmilitary, and they virtually never tell the

public--or their subordinates--the whole truth." Pausing, he gave her a

self-deprecating smile. "And I include myself in that category, Miss

Davis. I have to admit that I have not always been one-hundred percent

open. Truthfully, no one in power--no one, for that matter, in the

public eye at all-- can afford to be totally open. Now, I'm not saying I

ever did anything that I didn't honestly believe was in the best

interests of the Federation in the long run, and I'm certainly not

suggesting that Captain Kirk would ever do anything he didn't firmly

believe was in the best interests of his ship and crew. There have been

starship captains who might put their own interests above that of their

people, but Captain Kirk, I'm sure, is not one of them. His reputation

for integrity and competence is among the best in Starfleet, as I'm sure

you're aware. No, all I'm saying is that, probably for what he sees as

the best of motives, he's not letting us know everything that is

happening, either with the Mien craft or with the anomalies themselves.

The problem is that, since he is probably not as knowledgeable as he

could be concerning the anomalies, he just might be keeping to himself

the one piece of information that, in the hands of someone

moreknowledgeable, could be the key to our return to the Federation." As

he spoke, he continued to watch the play of emotions across her

guileless face, and it came to him once again that, unless he fumbled

badly, Ensign Davis was firmly in his camp. And with that recurring

thought, he realized that, sometime in the last few

minutes, some of the bleakness of his imprisonment had begun to lift. He

still could see little hope of ever returning to the Federation; the

gate had in all probability simply vanished, never to return, or perhaps

it only operated in the one direction. But now he was not totally alone.

In Ensign Davis he had an ally, a useful ally in what he had in that

moment begun to think of as a campaign. His Enterprise campaign. For a

moment, nostalgic memories of those long-ago campaigns that had launched

him on his public career filled his thoughts. Then strategies began to

leap into his mind, almost unbidden, and he wondered suddenly why he had

been so slow to take that final mental step. But at last he had taken

it. With the realization that he had established a firm toehold in the

enemy ranks, he had taken it. And now, using the kind of maneuvering he

knew best, he could build on that toehold. His life, he realized with an

inner smile, once more had a purpose.

Chapter Six

ALMOST PRECISELY THIRTY-SIX standard hours after the first contact with

the alien ship, Kirk was snatched from a dreamless sleep by the excited

voice of Lieutenant Jameson, the third-watch science officer. "Captain

Kirk, to the bridge," Jameson's staccato voice crackled over the

intercom. "Five more alien craft detected, apparently rendezvousing with

the first." Within minutes, Kirk, brushing his still-rumpled hair back

from his forehead with a quick motion of his fingers, emerged onto the

bridge only to find Mr. Spock already at the science station, absorbed

in the readouts and looking as if he had been there throughout the

watch. Lieutenant Jameson, standing back out of the way of his superior,

turned briefly toward the turbolift as Kirk entered. Despite a firmly

neutral expression on Jameson's face, Kirk could see in the young

officer's quick glance and in the fractional stiffness of his motions

that he was not pleased to have been displaced, even by Spock. This,

however, was neither the time nor the place to call him on an attitude

problem. "Situation, Mr. Spock," Kirk said, sliding into the command

chair vacated seconds before by Lieutenant Tanaka, who moved smoothly to

a point beyond the circular handrail, never taking his eyes from the

forward screen. "As Mr. Jameson first stated, Captain, five craft,

traveling in formation, appear to be rendezvousing with the craft we

have been tracking." "Rendezvousing? Not attacking?" "It would seem not.

They are all within range of each other now, and no hostilities have

been initiated by either side." "Reinforcements? These are the ships

those sub-space radio bursts were intended for?" "In all likelihood,

Captain. From the limited sensor data available, all five craft appear

to be identical to the first. However, based on the formation in which

the five craft were traveling, it would appear that one of those craft

was being purposely shielded by the others. The craft we have been

following has joined that protective formation." "A flagship of some

kind?" "Unlikely. As I said, Captain, all craft appear to be identical.

It is only the shielded position in the formation that distinguishes the

one craft from the others." "Interesting. Keep track of that craft, Mr.

Spock, even if the formation changes. Lieutenant Granger," Kirk went on,

turning toward Lieutenant Uhura's third-watch counterpart, "any subspace

radio activity?" "None," Granger's bass voice returned. "There hasn't

been a peep out of anyone since those bursts." "And no possibility of

tight-beam transmissions?" "Not from that ship, sir, not without our

knowing it." "Rendezvous complete, Captain," Spock announced. "All have

dropped to sublight and are clustered within kilometers of each other."

"Could they be communicating using something we can't pick up at this

distance?" "Affirmative, Captain. Direct visual communication is only

one of many possibilities our sensors could not detect." Whatever the

six ships were discussing, if anything, it didn't take long. After less

than five minutes clustered

in normal space, their velocities so precisely matched they could have

been linked by invisible rods, the six split apart and resumed warp

speed. "Where are they headed, Mr. Spock? And is the same ship still in

the center of the formation?" "Affirmative, Captain. They are now, in

effect, retracing the path of the first craft." Kirk grimaced. "Now that

they have a posse together, they're coming back to look for us."

"Apparently, Captain." "If the situation arises, how would our screens

hold up against the lot of them?" "Adequately, Captain, assuming all

have the same capability as the first, but we could not resist a great

many more." "Rather imprecise, Mr. Spock. How many is a great many?" "In

this case, assuming the Enterprise maintains peak efficiency, I would

estimate we could withstand the combined force of those six and another

four-point-seven ships before long-term overloading became a significant

danger." "That's all it would take? Eleven ships like that?"

"Affirmative, Captain. You must remember that, though their weapons

technology is at the level of the very early Federation ships, the

destructive energy they can deliver is greater by a factor of more than

fifteen. Virtually all their power is devoted to their drive and their

weapons, whereas only a small fraction of the power in the early

Federation ships was available for weaponry use. With crews of over a

hundred on Federation ships, a much greater percentage of available

power was utilized in maintaining the necessary environment. These ships

do not appear even to maintain an artificial gravity except by constant

rotation." "Thank you for the history refresher, Mr. Spock," Kirk said

with a faint smile as he rotated the command chair once again to face

the viewscreen.

"Mr. Woida," Kirk said to the massive, muscular third-watch helmsman,

"continue to track them--but keep us safely outside their sensor range."

"Yes, Captain," Woida responded in a voice surprisingly soft for a man

of his size. "And if they split up?" "Unless you receive orders to the

contrary, stay with the ship in the center of the formation, the one

apparently being protected." Nodding his acknowledgment, Woida hunched

more closely over his controls, his bulk almost completely hiding them

from Kirk's view. "Captain Kirk?" The voice came from behind him,

superimposed on the hiss of the closing door of the turbolift. "Yes, Dr.

Crandall?" Kirk said without turning from the viewscreen. "What's this

about new ships? I heard you summoned to the bridge." Kirk gestured at

the screen. "Five more ships," he said. "They met and apparently

conferred with the first a few minutes ago. Now they're retracing the

path of the ship that attacked us." "I see. And your plan of action?"

"For the moment, Doctor, the same as before. Wait and watch." "For how

long?" "At this point, no decision has been made." "And if they detect

the presence of the Enterprise?" "They won't, Doctor, unless we want

them to." "How can you be--" Crandall began, but he was cut off in

midsentence. "Another ship, Captain," Spock announced, giving its

coordinates. "This one is not identical to the others." "More advanced?"

"It appears to be the product of a roughly equivalent technology. It is

traveling at warp two." Spock paused, calling up new readouts.

"Antimatter engines and similar armaments. Six life forms on board, not

five." "Get the new ship on the screen, Mr. Woida, maximum

magnification."

In a swirl of light, the pinpoint images of the six vanished, replaced

by a barely larger image of the seventh. "Lieutenant Granger, any

indication of subspace radio activity?" "None, sir. This one's buttoned

up just as tight as the other six." '"Like the others," Spock added,

"its sensors are active, but that is all. The range of its sensors would

appear to be slightly less than that of the six." "Is it rendezvousing

with them?" "It would not appear so. However, its present course will

take it within sensor range of the six in no more than two-point-five

minutes." Drumming his fingers lightly on the arm of the command chair,

Kirk settled back to wait. Crandall, standing behind the handrail to one

side of the turbo-lift, watched as well, volunteering no comments or

further questions. "If ye need me," Scott's distinctive burr came over

the intercom from engineering, "I'm at the controls." "Nice to know, Mr.

Scott. Just keep things in their usual first-class shape." "Aye,

Captain, full power available to all systems--and a wee bit more if ye

need it." A moment later, the turbolift hissed open again, and a

scowling Dr. Leonard McCoy emerged. Looking more rumpled than usual, he

came to a stop at the handrail on the opposite side of the platform

opening from Dr. Crandall, his eyes darting from Kirk to Spock and back

before settling on the viewscreen. "Is that the one that attacked us?"

McCoy asked after a few seconds. "No, Bones," Kirk said, still watching

the screen.

"It and the other five are off the screen. This one just showed up. It

could be from a different faction altogether." "Let's hope so. And let's

hope this one will give us a chance to talk before it starts shooting."

"I wouldn't count on it," Kirk said. "According to Mr. Spock, this one

is at least as heavily armed as the others, and just as heavily

shielded." "The six are aware of the newcomer, Captain," Spock

announced. Kirk's fingers ceased their drumming as he sat up straighter.

"What are they doing?" "The first to detect it has just now made a

subspace transmission apparently identical to the one transmitted to us

by the first ship." "So it probably is some kind of identification code

or recognition signal. Is the other ship responding?" "Negative,

Captain. It is apparently unaware of the transmission." "And of the

other ships?" "It would seem so." Spock paused, studying his instruments

with seeming impassivity. "The same ship has now sent out a burst of

subspace energy similar to the one transmitted by our attacker, except

that it is shorter by ten milliseconds. And the six are changing course,

converging on the newcomer, who is now apparently aware of at least one

of them. It, too, has transmitted what appears to be an identification

code. Its makeup, however, is quite different, as is the frequency on

which it was transmitted." "Any response from the six?" "None, Captain.

And now the newcomer has emitted a burst of subspace energy as well,

this one of seventy-nine milliseconds duration." "Get us closer, Mr.

Woida," Kirk said abruptly, "as close as you can without getting within

their sens or range." "Yes, sir," the helmsman responded instantly, his

square fingers darting across the panels before him. The newcomer was

still centered in the viewscreen,

and as Kirk watched, one of the six appeared in the upper right

quadrant, then another in the lower left. "All lasers on five of the six

are readying to fire, Captain," Spock said. "Except for the ship that

has been at the center of the formation, they appear to be about to

launch an attack. The one ship appears to be purposely staying out of

range." "So they are from different factions," Kirk said, as if thinking

aloud. "Obviously," McCoy said, moving up next to the command chair.

"Aren't you going to do something about it, Jim?" "Something like

intervene on the newcomer's side? By firing on the other six?" "If

that's the only way to help, yes!" Kirk, his eyes still on the screen,

shook his head. "Getting involved in a local war our first day on the

block doesn't strike me as all that prudent, Bones. Besides, since we

haven't been able to talk to either side yet, we don't even know which

side, if either, we should be on." McCoy's scowl grew deeper. "We know

which side attacked us without warning, Jim!" he said, waving a hand in

exasperation. "What the devil more evidence do you need?" "There's

nothing to say the other ship wouldn't have done the same." "The

newcomer's lasers are now also preparing to fire," Spock announced. On

the screen, four of the six were now in view, closing in on the

newcomer. A moment later, space was crisscrossed with beams of fire, the

same brute-force fire that had washed over the shields of the Enterprise

thirty-six hours before. This time the results were far different.

Within seconds, the shields on three of the ships, including the

newcomer, had flared upward through the visible spectrum and far into

the ultraviolet, then collapsed precipitously. Once the shields were

down, the ships were disabled, almost destroyed, in even less time than

it

had taken to dispose of the shields. Their outer hulls scorched and half

melted, their propulsion units dead, they floated helplessly. The

remaining four, however, did not close in for the kill, nor did they

make any attempt to rescue anyone on their own companion ships. Instead,

the three that had launched the attack retreated, reestablishing as much

of a protective formation as they could around the fourth. "Survivors,

Mr. Spock?" Kirk snapped. "Four of the six life forms in the newcomer,

Captain, but only for another forty-nine seconds. An automatic

self-destruct sequence similar to the one observed in the first ship is

beginning in all three disabled vessels." Kirk's fingers tightened on

the arms of the command chair. "Mr. Woida, get us in there, maximum

warp! Transporter room, prepare to lock onto survivors! Security, full

detail to the transporter room! Be ready for anything when and if the

survivors are beamed aboard Abruptly, the star pattern shifted as the

Enterprise reached warp eight in record time. The newcomer's disabled

ship swelled explosively on the screen. Even before Kirk had completed

his orders, McCoy was darting from the bridge. "After what they've been

through, they'll need medical help, not a blasted security detail.;" he

muttered angrily, his voice loud enough for everyone on the bridge to

hear. "Transporter range coming up, Captain," Spock said. "First

antimatter detonation in twenty-six seconds." "Sublight, Mr. Woida, and

shields down for transporter lock-on "Shields down," Woida responded

instantly, and at the same time the motion of the dense star field on

the screen slowed almost to a stop. "Transporters locking on," a voice

said from the transporter room seconds later. Then, for an agonizing ten

seconds, there was total

silence on the bridge except for Spock's countdown to the seemingly

inevitable explosions. At eight seconds, a triumphant "Got 'em!" came

from the transporter room. "Maximum warp and shields up! Transporter

room, don't bring them in yet. Keep them in transit until further

orders." As the disabled ships fell astern, a small nova appeared

precisely on schedule, and then, seconds later, two more blossomed into

brief, searing life, their deadly energies dissipating harmlessly in the

space occupied seconds before by the Enterprise. "Mr. Woida, back to

warp factor six. Take us to extreme sensor range and hold at that

distance. Track the remaining four ships as before. Mr. Spock, is the

ship that originally attacked us among the survivors?" "Negative,

Captain," Spock supplied. "It was the first to be hit." "Very well."

Abruptly, Kirk stood up. "Mr. Tanaka, you have the con. If they split

up, track the one they seem to be protecting. Keep me informed." "Yes,

sir." His eyes on the screen, Tanaka slid into the chair as Kirk stepped

down. "Mr. Spock," Kirk said, "let's get down to the transporter room.

I'd like to see what we've got." Uncharacteristically, Spock did not

respond instantly. Instead, he remained bent over his readouts for

several seconds, calling up new information. Finally, with a wordless

nod to Lieutenant Jameson, the third-watch science officer, he picked up

his tricorder, slipped its strap across his shoulder, and hurried to

join Kirk at the turbolift. "I would advise extreme caution in dealing

with the survivors being beamed aboard, Captain," the science officer

said as the turbolift door closed behind them. "You have some new

information, Spock?" "My review of certain seemingly anomalous sensor

readings confirmed initial indications that the crew

compartments on all three ships survived the battle intact. All deaths

came after the battle had concluded." Kirk frowned as the door opened

and the two strode into the corridor toward the transporter room.

"You're positive?" "Yes, Jim, I'm sure," he said, his voice as

controlled as ever but with a trace less formality. "And it was the same

on all three ships?" "Precisely. The only difference is that in the lone

ship, four continued to survive." "And your instruments couldn't tell

you how the other twelve died?" "Only that they died with remarkable

suddenness. Their life readings vanished within milliseconds. Even

violent death is not normally so swift." Then they were at the

transporter room. Scotty had made his way up from the engineering deck

and was manning the controls. A security detail led by Lieutenant Ingrit

Tomson stood facing the transporter platform, their phasers in hand.

McCoy, a pair of nurses, and several orderlies with stretchers stood

behind them, the doctor obviously unhappy that he and the other medical

personnel were not in the front row. "Jim," he half growled, "after what

happened to their ship, these people aren't going to be any threat to

anyone! And these blasted security people won't--" "Spock, tell Dr.

McCoy and everyone else here what you told me," Kirk said, moving to

stand beside Scotty at the transporter controls as Spock repeated his

findings. When Spock had finished, Kirk said, "So you see, gentlemen,

these are not ordinary survivors, to say the very least. We don't know

what we're bringing aboard. And it would be prudent to keep in mind not

only how the disabled ships deliberately exploded their entire

antimatter fuel supply but how the ship that originally attacked us

acted once it became apparent that it couldn't destroy us with its

standard weapons. Whoever and whatever these people are, destruction

including self-destruction---seems to be a way of life with all of

them." McCoy, though maintaining his skeptical scowl, motioned for the

nurses and orderlies to move back, away from the security detail. "All

right, Mr. Scott," Kirk said, "let's bring one of them in. Security,

phasers on stun, and don't hesitate to use them." "Number one on the

way, Captain," Scott said, sliding the materialization control slowly

downward. "He'll be comin' in on transporter number six, at the back."

All eyes but Spock's swiveled toward the indicated transporter unit, and

a moment later the expected shimmering silhouette began to form. Spock,

though the arrival registered on his peripheral vision, kept his

attention focused on his tricorder. "Whatever it is, it's flat on its

back, probably unconscious," McCoy said as the shimmering took definite

shape, showing a generally humanoid form lying sprawled across the

transporter unit and well beyond. "Keep back anyway, Doctor," Kirk said,

"just in case." Slowly, the shimmering faded and was replaced by the

very solid body of the first of the aliens. As McCoy had said, it was

unconscious. It was also humanoid, probably male, very stocky and

muscular, hairless, and as pale as something that had lived its entire

life in darkness. Barely five feet from boot to crown, it was dressed in

a drab, utilitarian coverall with short sleeves and half a dozen bulky

pockets. There was no sign of anything resembling a weapon. Blood as red

as any human's oozed from a cut on the hairless scalp. McCoy started

forward, but Tomson blocked him. "Rectus, Creighton, check for weapons,"

she snapped, and two of the security detail darted forward, one

holstering his weapon and performing the search while the other stood

close over the alien, her phaser pointed directly at the sprawled form.

"This is insane, Jim!" McCoy protested. "He obviously needs medical

attention!" "No weapons, sir," the searcher reported tersely, standing

and retrieving his phaser from its holster. "All right, Bones, you can

have him. But Security stays with him, too. Lieutenant Tomson, send one

guard with Dr. McCoy. And don't hesitate to stun the alien at the first

sign of any sudden move. Understood?" "Understood, sir," she said,

nodding at the man who had conducted the search. "Stay with him, Mr.

Reems. You heard the captain." "Yes, sir." Shaking his head in renewed

exasperation, McCoy hurried forward, motioning one of the nurses, an

olive-skinned brunette named Garcia, to follow. As he ran the medical

tricorder over the alien's body, his scowl faded slightly. "Hard to tell

without knowing what's normal for these people, but his injuries appear

to be minor. And with red blood and only one heart, he's probably more

human than some of us." Standing up, McCoy motioned for two of the

orderlies to get the alien on a stretcher. One of the two glanced

questioningly toward Kirk as he helped shift the body, and when Kirk

nodded, the orderly fastened the stretcher's security straps firmly

across chest and legs. McCoy only shook his head again, saying nothing

but making his impatience plain. With the alien fully restrained, the

two orderlies lifted the stretcher easily, crossed the transporter

platform and walked down the steps. Nurse Garcia stayed close to the

stretcher on one side while Ensign Reems, the security man, stayed

slightly to the rear on the other side. The rest of the security detail

and McCoy's people parted to give them a clear path to the door to the

corridor. Spock, his attention still on the tricorder, kept the

instrument centered on the alien. "Well, Jim, what about the next one?"

McCoy prompted irritably.

"As soon as--" Kirk began, but he was cut off by an abrupt, wheezing

sound from the stretcher. The two orderlies came to a sudden stop, and

Reems took a single step to one side, keeping his phaser trained

directly on the alien. Nurse Garcia put a hand lightly on the alien's

arm and looked down at him, hoping the touch and her expression would

appear more reassuring than threatening. For several seconds, the only

sound was that of the alien breathing, now only a faint rasping, not the

loud wheeze of the initial intake of breath. He was the focus of all

eyes in the transporter room. Even Spock glanced up briefly from his

tricorder. Then the alien's eyes opened, suddenly, as if the lids were

shutters of a pair of cameras. For the first fraction of a second, the

eyes, an almost fluorescent green, stared straight up, unseeing, their

huge pupils shrinking rapidly, but then, as they focussed on Garcia's

dark features and glossy black hair, they widened in what, in a human,

would have been sheer terror. For another instant, the eyes darted in

all directions, flickering across everyone in the room. The slitlike

mouth opened a fraction of an inch, just enough to reveal almost

human-looking teeth, and then it and the eyes clamped tightly shut, and

the entire body stiffened so abruptly it shook the stretcher.

Instinctively, Garcia reached out again, and this time her hand came to

rest on the alien's chest. "It's all right," she said softly, but the

alien's body seemed sent into convulsions by her action. The stretcher

was almost wrenched from the orderlies' hands. Pulling back, Garcia

turned to cast a helpless look at Dr. McCoy. In the same instant, the

alien's convulsive motions stopped, .and he became not just motionless

but stiff, as if every muscle in his body was tensed and fighting every

other muscle. Any tighter, and bone and tendon would begin to snap. The

only sound, though, was the grinding of the alien's teeth and a brief

sigh of relief from one of the orderlies as they recovered their

grip on the stretcher and moved through the door to the corridor. "I

told you--" McCoy began, but the rest of his protest was cut off by an

urgently barked order from Spock. "Drop the stretcher! Everyone move

back, immediately!"

Chapter Seven

STARTLED BY THE INTENSITY in the Vulcan's normally impassive voice, the

orderlies responded instantly, though their training forced them to take

a split second to lower the stretcher to the corridor floor rather than

dropping it. A moment later, as they and Ensign Reems were scrambling

back into the transporter room, the corridor was filled with a blinding,

almost silent flash and a wave of heat that scorched the walls. Garcia,

whose obvious concern for the alien had caused her to react more slowly

than the orderlies, was still in the door, turning to follow them, when

the flash came. Soundlessly, she completed the turn, but her right hand

and arm, which had been extended into the corridor, were caught in the

brief inferno. As the glare faded and a hubbub of voices erupted around

her, she stood motionless just inside the transporter room door. But

then, as her effort to move the arm brought the momentarily deadened

nerves back to screaming life, she gasped. Suddenly she was bathed in

the cold sweat of shock, and the room began a dizzying whirl that ended

only when she crumpled, unconscious, to the floor. Dr. McCoy, seeing the

arm discoloring and blistering even as he watched, spun on a second pair

of orderlies. "Get her down to surgery, now!" When the orderlies

hesitated even a fraction of a second as they glanced toward the

scorched corridor

through which they would have to pass, McCoy snatched the stretcher from

them and slammed it to the floor next to Garcia. Sliding his hands under

her, he smoothly., swiftly slid her onto it. By that time, the orderlies

had recovered, and they quickly snatched up the stretcher and raced into

the corridor, past the virtually vaporized remains of the alien. With a

wordless glance toward Kirk, McCoy followed at a run. "Obviously you saw

it coming, Mr. Spock," Kirk said as he glanced at Spock's tricorder,

"but do you have any suggestions for keeping it from happening again if

we bring the others in?" "Only to keep them unconscious, Captain, so

they are unable to activate the devices. Then we can attempt to locate

and disarm those devices." "You know what happened, then?" "I know only

that there was a short pulse of electromagnetic energy, followed by a

power buildup within a device buried somewhere in the being's body. In

some ways, it was similar to the power buildup that precedes the firing

of their ships' lasers." "At least they're consistent," Kirk said,

shaking his head grimly. Minutes later, the next alien was brought in

from the transporter matrix. He was as unconscious as the first, but

even so, he was immediately subjected to a precautionary phaser burst

that sent him even deeper into oblivion. Like the first, he was stocky

and hairless and, except for the large-pupiled green eyes, could have

passed for an odd-looking human. "Monitor his vitals at all times," Kirk

cautioned as the alien was placed on another stretcher. "And trust what

the tricorder says, not how the alien looks or acts. If your readings

give the slightest indication that he's waking up, stun him again. Now

get him down to the medical section fast, and find out how to keep him

from vaporizing himself--and us."

The three-dimensional, computer-generated image on the diagnostic screen

showed that the alien was

indeed as close to human as the earlier tricorder scannings had

indicated. The heart was oddly bell-shaped, and the rib cage extended

over much of the solidly muscled abdomen, but there were no really

fundamental anatomical differences. The blood, iron-based, was similar

to human blood but not similar enough to allow transfusions. Body

temperature was a cool ninety-one degrees, giving his skin an oddly

snakelike feel which seemed to match his total hair-lessness and

slitlike mouth. The major difference was not anatomical but, as

expected, artificial. Buried deep in the chest cavity, directly beneath

the heart, was a small but powerful omnidirectional laserlike device.

Embedded in the center of the device was an almost invisible kernel that

Spock's science tricorder identified as a radio receiver which, when

activated, would trigger the surrounding device. Even with the knowledge

the instruments gave of the alien's anatomy and metabolism, however, it

would be virtually impossible to surgically remove the device, even

without having to worry about how to keep from setting it off. Disabling

it remotely without inadvertently triggering it seemed equally

difficult. In the end, however, Dr. Rajanih, in charge of the ship's

dental unit, discovered what everyone else had overlooked. What had

appeared at first to be one of a dozen similar fillings in the alien's

teeth turned out instead to be a seed-sized transmitter operated in much

the same way that long-ago Terran spies had operated the cyanide

capsules that a few of the more fanatical had had installed in their

teeth. Simply grinding the teeth in a particular way would break the

seal over the transmitter, and the alien's saliva, even more acidic than

a human's, would act as an electrolyte, instantly activating the

minuscule battery that powered the transmitter, until then totally inert

and undetectable. Within less than a second after the saliva touched the

almost microscopic battery plates, the transmitter would receive a short

spurt of power, enabling it to send out a short-range microwave pulse

that triggered the receiver embedded beneath the alien's heart. Once the

transmitter had been removed from the tooth and transported to another

part of the ship, well shielded from the receiver, the nature of the

pulse it transmitted was analyzed. With that knowledge, then, the

receiver itself could be safely disabled so the device couldn't be

triggered intentionally by more distant but more powerful transmitters

or accidentally by any of the countless forms of energy that permeated

virtually every cubic centimeter of the Enterprise and every other

functional starship. Once the living but still unconscious alien had

been successfully disarmed, Kirk, on his way back to the transporter

room, paused to glance into surgery. McCoy, he saw, was putting the

finishing touches on Garcia's hand and arm. "Will she be all right,

Bones?" he asked as McCoy, pulling in a deep, relieved breath, extracted

his hands from the surgical machinery, removed the vision helmet and

stepped back. "It looks good so far ," he said. Pausing, he looked back

at the operating table and the machinery an enclosed cluster of

micro-manipulators and op-tics--that was only now being removed from the

arm. "You know, Jim, I make a big deal now and then out of being just a

country doctor who doesn't trust every new gadget that comes down the

pike. But every now and then, I have to admit that I'm damned glad I've

got a few of them." "They're no better than the person who operates

them, Bones," Kirk said quietly. "That was good work, as usual." A

faint, crooked smile worked its way onto McCoy's still-haggard features.

"Thanks, Jim. And thanks for not saying I told you so. You and the

green-blooded goblin both." "There are times when such things are

neither appropriate nor logical, Bones, and this was one of those times.

Meanwhile, if you're interested, we've discovered how to defang our

friends." "Those walking disintegrators, you mean?" McCoy's eyebrows

twitched upward inquiringly, and some of the tiredness seemed to fade

from his face. "Exactly. We brought a second one back, and now that

we've defused him, we're going to haul in the other two." As they made

their way back to the transporter room, Kirk filled McCoy in on the last

hour. The doctor only shook his head. "What kind of people would do

something like that?" he asked incredulously when Kirk finished. "People

who are desperate or fanatical or both," Kirk said. Then he added

quietly, "Humans have been doing it for millennia in one form or

another. Don't forget where the term 'kamikaze' originated." McCoy

sighed. "I know, Jim. Every now and then I try to forget that that kind

of insanity was a part of our history, but it always comes back. And

it's always just as hard to understand." "Hard to accept, perhaps,

Bones, but not always that hard to understand," Kirk said. And then he

continued before McCoy could protest, "Now let's see if we can find out

what drove these people to such measures. Now that we know how to keep

them alive long enough to ask them some questions, maybe we've even got

a chance of getting some answers."

It was fifteen hours and a fitful sleep later when Kirk, Spock, McCoy,

Nurse Chapel, Rahanih, and Dr. Crandall, along with Tomson, Reems, and

Creighton from security, stood in the largest diagnostic room of the

medical section waiting for the first of the three surviving aliens to

awaken. Cushioned straps held him firmly to the similarly cushioned

table, the upper half of which had been tilted upward so that the alien

was half upright, facing his captors. A universal translator, linked

directly to the main computer, would pick up

every sound the alien made as well as monitor and map his neuronic

activity. Under these conditions, with the translator augmented by the

full capacity of the computer, communication would be possible in a

matter of minutes. Finally, after nearly ten minutes of silence except

for the nervous shifting of Crandall's feet, the instruments monitoring

the alien's condition indicated he was fully awake. Yet he did not move.

"Playing possum, do you think, Bones?" Kirk asked softly. His answer

came not from McCoy but from the alien. At the sound of Kirk's voice,

the alien stiffened, but his eyes did not open. Instead, after sucking

in a single rasping breath, he clamped his teeth together, grinding them

forcefully. When the expected sudden death did not come, he ground his

teeth together even more violently, until the grating sound was audible

to everyone in the room. "When he finally decides to open his eyes, Dr.

Rajanih, show him what you took from his tooth," Kirk said, still

purposely keeping his voice as calm and unthreatening as he could. For

nearly half a minute in all, the grinding continued, the alien's face

becoming more contorted with each second, his entire body stiffening as

every muscle tensed. There was, however, none of the convulsive jerking

that the first alien had exhibited. Suddenly, as if some mental switch

had finally been turned off, the grinding stopped, and the alien seemed

to collapse, every muscle going limp. Then, slowly, the eyes still

closed, one arm moved, coming to an abrupt stop as it pressed against

the cushioned restraining strap. Then the other arm moved similarly, and

finally the legs, but the motions remained slow and fluid and

deliberate. Even so, after a few seconds it became apparent from the

faint creaking

sounds made by the straps that he was exerting a startling amount of

pressure. "What about the light level, Bones?" Kirk asked, frowning

abruptly as he turned to McCoy. "We should have thought of it before,

but their large pupils and extreme paleness probably mean they're

accustomed to lower levels of light than we are." "You don't worry about

lighting when you're trying to keep your patient from exploding in your

face!" McCoy flared, but a moment later he subsided. "You're right,

Jim," he said, a touch of apology in his voice. "Nurse Chapel, bring it

down fifty percent. And we should probably lower the temperature, too.

Remember that their body temperature is almost eight degrees below

ours." "Good idea," Kirk said. "Tell environment to lower the

temperature, how much, Bones? Eight degrees?" McCoy shook his head.

"Five or six is enough for a start." With the light level reduced,

Chapel spoke into the nurse's station intercom, passing on the

instructions. The temperature dropped, though not as quickly as the

light level had. Dr. Crandall, who was wearing a short-sleeved blue

tunic, folded his arms, chafing his hands along his upper arms. Finally,

the alien's limbs relaxed once again, his arms falling back against the

surface of the table. For more than a minute, then, the only motion was

that of his chest as it moved in a rapid, shallow breathing pattern.

Then, at last, the eyes opened, but just a slit. The motion would have

been missed entirely had everyone not been watching so closely.

Underneath the lids, the eyes moved surreptitiously from side to side.

Other than that, the alien was now totally motionless. "The implant, Dr.

Rajanih," Kirk prompted. Rajanih, who had been watching the alien

raptly, cast a quick, apologetic glance toward Kirk as he raised the

small transparent container that held the

device. Shaking it gently, he moved closer to the alien and held it

directly in front of his slitted eyes. For another long moment, the

alien was totally motionless, including his eyes. Even his breathing

once again halted, and his heartbeat, after a momentary spurt, slowed as

well. McCoy, startled by the suddenly reduced heart rate, started to

approach the alien but stopped after only a couple of steps. "If we

missed something else," he said, shaking his head, "some kind of organic

backup system that allows him to simply stop his heart, it's too late to

do anything about it now." "I would say he simply has excellent mental

discipline," Rajanih said. "Many races have similar abilities." Spock

nodded his agreement. "If he is determined to die and is able to induce

death through mental control of normally automatic functions such as

heartbeat, there is little we can do." "Except keep him unconscious

while we try to figure out what we can do," Kirk said, nodding to the

security team. "Be ready if I give the word." But even as Kirk spoke,

the heart rate leveled off. A moment later, the alien's eyes opened, not

as widely as those of the first alien, but in what looked like a partial

squint, as if the light were still slightly too bright for comfort. They

were fastened on the implant in Ra-janih's hand, and as the alien looked

at it, his almost nonexistent lips parted slightly, and his jaw and

cheek moved in a very humanlike pattern that indicated he was probing

the formerly deadly tooth with his tongue. Apparently feeling the smooth

solidity that had replaced the transmitter and its comparatively uneven

and fragile seal, the alien abandoned the probing and began looking at

his watchers more directly, his eyes meeting and briefly holding first

Rajanih's, then Kirk's, then those of each of the others who stood

watching him. The alien's eyes held not so much a challenge as an

acknowledgment of his situation, yet by no means a surrender. There was

nothing submissive in those eyes. "Lower the light another twenty

percent, Bones," Kirk said quietly, and McCoy complied. As the light

lowered, the alien's lids raised until, when another five percent of the

light was removed, his eyes were fully open. They were also fastened on

Kirk, as if the alien had deduced that he was the one in charge simply

from the fact that when he had spoken, someone else had immediately

responded. "Now if we can just get him to talk, at least enough to give

the computer a start on figuring out his language," McCoy said. "Based

on his behavior so far," Kirk said, "that doesn't seem all that likely.

And even if we do get his language sorted out, I suspect we will get

little more than his equivalent of name, rank, and serial number, if

that much." And they didn't. After nearly half an hour of trying, during

which everyone, even Dr. Crandall, took turns trying to elicit some

speech from the alien, he remained silent. He was obviously listening

very closely, but, equally obviously, he had no intention of making a

single sound. Nor did they do any better when, over the next two hours,

they allowed the other two aliens, held in separate facilities, to

awaken. Both went through variations on the same routine as they

awakened, both attempting to activate the missing transmitter and both

feigning unconsciousness as soon as they realized death was not

forthcoming. One of them, according to the monitors, actually did lose

consciousness for a brief period, growing even paler as he slumped

against the padded straps, while the other, the tallest of the three by

inches, broke into uncontrollable convulsions even more violent than

those of the first one beamed aboard. Briefly, a series of sounds, more

like keening wails than screams or shouts, poured from the taller

one's barely opened mouth, but even the most complete computer .analysis

of the sounds couldn't extract any meaning or even any patterns, and

once the outburst was over he remained utterly, rigidly silent. Finally,

after a second twenty-minute session with the first of the three aliens,

Kirk called a halt to the increasingly frustrating operation and turned

to Dr. McCoy. "Now that they're stable---they are stable, aren't they,

Bones?" "They seem to be, yes, but I can't guarantee they don't still

have a few surprises for us." "Understood. That will have to be good

enough." Kirk turned to Lieutenant Tomson of security. "Lieutenant,

release the straps on this one. Let's see what he does." While Creighton

and Reems held their phasers at the ready, Tomson released the straps,

the alien's eyes following her every motion. For a few seconds after the

straps retracted invisibly into the surface of the table, the alien

remained motionless. Then, moving tentatively, he sat up straighter and

turned and slid off the table, holding onto its edge as his booted feet

settled on the floor. Releasing the table, he swayed unsteadily, as if

he couldn't quite keep his balance. All the while, though, his eyes

moved about the group, pausing on the pair of phasers in the guards'

hands, obviously assessing them as weapons. "Escort him to one of our

detention cells," Kirk said. "Then take the other two and put them in

the same cell. Perhaps, with none of us around, they'll talk to each

other." "Yes, sir," Tomson replied. "Creighton," she said, motioning the

ensign forward. He reached out and took the alien's arm, firmly but not

harshly. The alien didn't resist. His eyes went briefly to the hand on

his arm, and, when Creighton urged him forward, he moved. Until they

drew abreast of Captain Kirk. Without warning, without even a

premonitory flicker of his eyes, the alien tore loose from

Creighton's grip and threw himself at Kirk, who barely had time to half

raise his arms before the alien had slammed into his shoulder, spinning

him around. A fraction of a second later, the alien's short but powerful

arm was reaching up and around Kirk's neck from behind, bringing the

forearm up under Kirk's chin with a force that in another second would

snap his neck.

Chapter Eight

IT WAS ONLY the phasers of the two security guards that saved Kirk, both

beams catching the alien squarely. One, however, also caught Kirk in its

periphery, sending him reeling to the edge of unconsciousness himself.

An instant later, Tomson was pulling the now limp form of the alien from

Kirk while McCoy and Spock both gripped Kirk's arms to support him until

he could steady himself. "Jim! Are you all right?" McCoy's gravelly

voice was tense in Kirk's ear. After a second, Kirk nodded. "A little

shaky from the phaser, but that's all. Which is, as they say, vastly

preferable to the alternative," he went on, still a little unsteady on

his feet as he turned to the two security guards. "Thank you, Lieutenant

Tomson, Ensign Reems, for your prompt action. Kirk looked at the alien

then, its stocky body now slumped to the floor.-"Get this one to the

detention cell," he said, pausing a second to blink away yet another

brief wave of dizziness from the phaser. "Then put one of the

others--just one, the taller one, not both, in with him. We'll watch and

listen and hope something develops. Use your largest cell, and see what

can be done about making it look less like a cell before they wake up

again." Tomson nodded, and, with Creighton and Reems, picked the alien

up and carried him out. "One thing for sure," McCoy said as the door

slid shut behind the security guards and the alien, "they aren't stupid.

That one's been listening even if he can't understand the language, and

he's already figured out who the boss is." Kirk nodded ruefully. "So

he'd know who to try to kill first." "You have to start somewhere,"

Crandall offered, "and it was a form of communication." At first, Kirk

took the words to be Crandall's first modest attempt at humor in all the

weeks since he had boarded the Enterprise, but a look at the man's

deadly earnest expression quickly persuaded him otherwise.

By the time the two aliens were installed in their barless detention

cell, it resembled a small stateroom more than a cell. Kirk doubted that

the comparatively pleasant surroundings would impress the aliens to any

noticeable extent, but, as he had told the chief of security who had

supervised the hasty redecoration of the cell, it couldn't hurt. The

taller alien was the first to awaken from his phaser-induced

unconsciousness, and he began once again to tremble even before he

opened his eyes. But then, when his eyes twitched open and he saw his

companion stretched out on a second narrow cot on the opposite side of

the disguised cell, the trembling stopped abruptly, and he lay rigidly

still for several seconds, as if trying to gain full control of himself.

Briefly, then, he poked at his deactivated tooth, first with his tongue

and then, more forcefully, with his finger. Even as he checked his own

tooth, however, he moved to the other cot and just as quickly checked

his companion's tooth. When he saw that its implant, too, had been

removed, he slumped momentarily but then straightened himself, moved

stiffly back to his own cot, and sat down to wait. After another minute,

as if acting on an afterthought, he stood and tried the door and made

his way slowly around the tiny room, closely inspecting the walls, then

peering up at the translucent ceiling

through which the room's only light was provided. Finally, apparently

satisfied there was nothing else he could do, he sat down once again to

wait. Five minutes later, the other alien awakened. Like the first, he

checked his tooth almost immediately. And that was the last thing either

of them did for more than twelve hours. When food, which McCoy's

metabolic analysis of the aliens had enabled the computerized galley to

synthesize, was brought in, they both ignored it. Watching them on a

screen in the wardroom, Kirk did not seem surprised. "If they can't kill

themselves any other way, they'll starve themselves to death," he said

with a sigh to Dr. McCoy, who was watching with him. "They'd probably

try to strangle each other except they know we'd stop them. What about

intra-venous? Can you whip up something that will keep them going in

spite of themselves?" McCoy nodded. "Probably, but I don't think it's

going to get us anywhere. These are very stubborn people, Jim, even more

stubborn than your average starship commander." "Have some prepared

anyway," Kirk said. Then he added, with a quick grin, "And thanks for

the encouragement. If you'd said they were more stubborn than your

average ship's doctor, I might've given up hope altogether." For a long

time, then, Kirk sat alone watching the two, almost as silent and

motionless as the aliens themselves. He had hoped that, left alone with

each other, they would talk enough for the combined capabilities of the

universal translator and the computer to come up with a first pass at

their language, enough for at least the beginnings of communication, but

that obviously was not going to happen. Even the translators, with their

ability to analyze a subject's neuronic activity, required some spoken

words to work with, some sounds to match with the neuronic patterns.

These beings were apparently not only fanatically

determined to kill themselves while doing the most possible damage to

their supposed enemy in the process. They were also fanatically stoic

and patient once they had recovered from the initial shock of learning

they couldn't kill themselves. They were simply determined to have no

meaningful contact with the enemy. They were, he realized more

forcefully with each passing minute, the ultimate embodiment of the

"name, rank, and serial number" philosophy. As long as they thought the

Enterprise was the enemy-- Abruptly, he stood up. "Lieutenant Tomson,"

he said, speaking into the wardroom intercom, "Kirk here. Bring three

guards and meet me ASAP at the aliens' cells. We're going to give them a

tour of the Enterprise."

Restrained only by padded wrist manacles that fastened the three

together and by the prominently displayed phasers of the security team,

the aliens were escorted first to the engineering deck. From the moment

the three emerged suspiciously from their cells, Kirk kept up a running

commentary on everything they passed through or by. During the first

moments of the tour, as the seemingly endless corridors they were led

through began to give them some small appreciation of the true vastness

of the Enterprise, they allowed some emotion to show on their faces, but

by the time they reached the turbolift, their faces were once again the

expressionless blanks they had maintained for the past dozen hours in

their cells. As they were urged from the turbolift on the main

engineering deck, the group was met by Chief Engineer Scott, who, after

an initial skeptical glance at Kirk, took the three on basically the

same tour that his assistant had taken Crandall on during his first days

on board. Predictably, they remained stone-faced throughout, barely

deigning even to turn their eyes in the direction of the control

consoles, the repair shops, or even the impulse power units, even though

Kirk

was positive that all three were meticulously recording each and every

detail somewhere inside their hairless skulls. Only once did they lose

some small measure of their composure, and that was when, in the

remote-scanning monitor room, they were suddenly confronted with the

brilliantly vivid image of the dilithium-focused, anti-matter hear t of

the Enterprise. Even then, no sound came from their almost lipless

mouths. Only their eyes widened, and the tallest of the three twitched

backward involuntarily from the inferno on the huge screen. Within

another second, however, the impassivity was restored to their features,

and it was as if the mind-boggling release of power they were observing

was nothing more than an oversized candle flame. An hour later, with no

further cracks having appeared even momentarily in their facade of

indifference, the three were escorted onto the bridge. As it had

everywhere the aliens were taken, the overall lighting had been reduced

to a level McCoy had estimated would be tolerable to them. Even though

the three appeared as impassive as ever, two of them half stumbled when

the security detail urged them down the steps and closer to the main

viewscreen, where the computer-generated images of the stars were every

bit as real and probably twice as vivid as anything the aliens had ever

seen, even at sublight. The four alien craft, still being tracked, were

nonluminous dots, one in each quadrant of the screen. "Mr. Spock," Kirk

said, "is our little show-and-tell ready to roll?" "Of course, Captain."

"Very well. Let's get the show on the road." With only the slightest

arch of his eyebrow at Kirk's choice of words, Spock turned back to the

science station. "Computer," he said, "begin." Immediately, the

real-time image on the viewscreen was replaced by another, this one also

computer

generated but totally different from the star field it' replaced. The

new image was a view of the interior of the bridge itself, including all

bridge personnel and the aliens themselves, standing exactly where they

were actually standing, moving as they moved. After a few seconds, the

viewpoint from which the image was seen began to shift, rising from a

point above the viewscreen toward the upper bulkhead. But it didn't stop

there. Slowly, it continued to rise until it had passed through the

bulkhead, itself appearing as if part of a blueprint transparency,

leaving the interior of the bridge still visible beyond it. The

structural members and the miles of cables running between the multiple

layers of the bulkhead directly above the bridge were visible and yet

did not obscure the bridge itself and the people inside. And still the

viewpoint continued to rise, until finally the entire

hundred-and-thirty-meter saucer that was the primary hull was included

on the screen, the transparent "cutaway" area above the bridge now only

a tiny circle in the center, the people inside little more than dots.

Then, as the viewpoint continued to rise even higher above the

Enterprise, the transparent cutaway section opaqued, becoming just

another segment of the gleaming metal of the hull. After another full

minute, the entire ship, including primary and secondary hulls and the

massive warp-drive units, was on the screen. For yet another minute, the

viewpoint lingered there, givIng the aliens sufficient time to fully

appreciate the size of the vessel, and for a moment Kirk wondered if the

computer were going to superimpose an image of one of the relatively

tiny alien vessels for comparison. But Spock and the computer had come

up with nothing that simple. Again, the viewpoint began to move, this

time swooping gracefully down toward a spot on the primary hull

immediately above the bridge. Instead of

continuing through the bulkhead and into the bridge, however, it slowed

and stopped and oriented itself to look forward, directly over the hull,

the upper skin of which remained massively visible across the bottom of

the screen. That was when what Kirk remembered as real images began to

appear, selected excerpts from the computer's records of what had

happened to the Enterprise since it had first appeared in this sector of

space. One after another, the scenes were seamlessly woven together and

superimposed above the ever-present image of the hull. The only episode

of interest that was omitted was the brief and frustrating investigation

of the planet that had, far below its radiation-soaked surface, given

readings indicating both a functional antimatter power source and a form

of life that not even Spock had been able to classify. The aliens

remained impassive, even at the repeated scenes of planetwide

destruction, but when the image of the first ship appeared, they

stiffened. And when the ship attacked, its lasers slicing through the

intervening space, they could not keep from flinching, nor could they

keep their faces totally expressionless as the laser beams flared

harmlessly but spectacularly against the Enterprise's shields, leaving

the ship itself untouched. And so it went, until the re-creation of

those few deadly seconds when the three ships had been destroyed. Then,

as the two ships in the attacking group were shown struck and disabled,

the three aliens for the first time turned their eyes briefly toward

each other. They were, Kirk was sure, grimly congratulating each other

on having taken two of the enemy with them. Then, as the illusory

Enterprise on the screen shot forward at warp eight, the aliens turned

abruptly back to the screen, unable any longer to maintain their

pretended indifference. Watching closely now, they saw the Enterprise

drop out of warp drive even more quickly than their own ships were

capable of doing. As the Enterprise came almost to a standstill only

kilometers from the alien-ship, a ghostly beam, obviously not a laser,

stabbed out from the Enterprise, touching and penetrating the alien

vessel. At the same time, the viewpoint of the image darted along the

beam, halting a bare hundred meters outside the scorched and fused

surface of the alien vessel. In another second, the massive thickness of

the vessel's hull faded, just as that of the Enterprise had done at the

start of the display. Here, though, there were no blueprintlike details,

only an indistinct grayness, in the center of which appeared the tiny

crew compartment, the only internal structure for which the sensors had

determined a true size and shape in the seconds the Enterprise had been

within detailed scanning range. Inside one of the crew compartments,

indistinct images of four aliens appeared, floating unconscious in their

now gravitationless environment. In another compartment, its walls

scorched, were the sparse remains of the other two. For several seconds,

then, the ghostly beam--ap-parently the computer's imagined

representation of the transporter beams--rested on both compartments.

Finally, the beam shrank and focused on the four aliens who remained

alive, its illusory substance splitting into four beams, each

solidifying around one of the surviving aliens and, a moment later,

magically lifting them out of the ship to hang in empty space, seemingly

protected only by the beams themselves. As quickly as it had in reality,

the Enterprise shot away, rainbowing into warp drive in seconds, taking

the aliens with it. Behind it, the three ships blossomed once again into

miniature novas. Finally, with the Enterprise tracking the four

surviving ships, the computer's representations of the rescued aliens

were shown being drawn in toward the Enterprise, making the imaginary

transporter beams look even more like visible manifestations of tractor

beams than they had before. From that point on, the screen showed the

aliens the computer's record of precisely what had happened to

them once they were on board--how their comrade had destroyed himself

and nearly destroyed Nurse Garcia's arm, how the remaining three had

been returned one at a time and kept unconscious while they were

examined, and, finally, how the transmitters had been removed from their

teeth. The show ended when the first of the three was allowed to awaken.

"Very impressive," Kirk said when the last image vanished and was

replaced by a real-time view of the super-dense star field around them,

including the four dots that were the remaining alien ships. Looking at

the aliens once again, Kirk was surprised to see that something bearing

a suspicious resemblance to a tear was emerging from the eyes of the one

on the end. More and more human, he thought. And less and less the total

automatons they appear to be forcing themselves to be. A moment later,

as if to confirm Kirk's speculation, the alien who seemed to be crying

suddenly spun about to face the other two as well as he could with the

manacles still attaching his right hand to the left of the one next to

him. And he spoke, the first intentional sounds uttered by any of the

three since they had been beamed on board. The voice was harsh and

keening but with a singsong quality that reminded Kirk of the tonal

inflections of some Terran Oriental tongues. The alien in the middle,

the tallest of the three and the one who had come closest to losing

control when he had first been awakened, barked a single syllable and

brought his right hand up in an obvious gesture for silence, though it

was robbed of some of its effectiveness by the manacle that linked the

hand to that of his comrade on his right. In any event, the first alien

did not stop talking, and after a few seconds he began gesturing with

his free hand, waving it in the direction of the viewscreen and then in

all directions, as if trying to include the entire Enterprise in his

gesture. In response, the middle alien, perhaps the senior of the three,

perhaps trying to make up for what he considered his own earlier lapse

of control, repeated the single syllable he had uttered before, adding a

brief string of harsh, staccato sounds. The third alien then spoke up

for the first time, pointing toward Dr. McCoy, who stood not far from

Spock near the science station. Not wanting anything to interrupt the

sudden flow of words, Kirk gestured to the security team, motioning for

them to lower th eir phasers and stand back. As they complied, the first

alien caught the motion and gestured wildly in the direction of the

security team, then erupted with a new torrent of words. The one in the

center, however, would still have nothing to do with it. With a final

harsh repeat of the one syllable he had already used, he clamped his

mouth shut and turned his face away. "Sir," Tomson said quietly, almost

in Kirk's ear, "Mr. Spock would like a word." Looking around quickly,

Kirk saw Spock motioning subtly to him. Glancing briefly at the aliens,

Kirk stepped back and made his way past the command chair and up the

steps to the science station. "Yes, Mr. Spock?" "I believe the computer

will be able to provide us with a rudimentary translation capability

very shortly," Spock said, keeping his voice low in order not to risk

interrupting the aliens' sudden talkativeness. "Ordinarily a totally

unknown language would require a much more extensive data base than we

are receiving verbally, but it appears that much of the needed data has

already been acquired by means of the subspace burst this ship

initiated. In addition, because those bursts appear to have been

primarily descriptions of two of the other ships, and because images of

those ships were included in the information in the bursts, the computer

has been able to establish additional relationships and

cross-references." "Excellent. But how soon is shortly?" "You should be

able to exchange very basic information already, Captain."

Kirk turned back to the aliens. The tallest one was still rigidly

silent, and the other two had apparently given up arguing with him. And

one of them, the one whose tears Kirk had noticed only minutes before,

was now looking directly at Kirk. But it was also the same one, Kirk

realized with a touch of uneasiness, who had tried to break his neck

earlier, when he had decided Kirk was the one in charge and therefore

the one to kill.

Chapter Nine

KiRK KNEW IT could be sheer folly to assign Terran human emotions to

expressions appearing on the faces of totally unknown non-Terran

humanoids, no matter how closely those expressions appeared to match

corresponding human expressions. Even so, the expressions existed and

had to be taken into consideration. And the seeming similarities so far

noted--the tears, the momentary panic upon first awakening in totally

alien surroundings, the stoic passivity broken briefly when confronted

by objects or images they couldn't quite control their reactions to--did

appear to outweigh the differences. And now the face of the one looking

directly at Kirk held neither the rigid passivity of the long hours in

the cell nor any indication of the hatred that had briefly twisted his

features during the attack. The eyes, more deeply recessed than most

humans', were still moist from the apparent tears of a minute before.

The jaw, rounded but solid, no longer appeared thrust belligerently

forward but, because of the slightly lowered head, seemed almost to

recede. The entire body, while not slumping in defeat, stood more

loosely, its posture somehow softer, conveying both defiance and

something else, perhaps a form of apology. "We are not your enemies,"

Kirk spoke slowly into the translator, deliberately holding it up in

full view and looking directly at the aliens. For a moment, there was

silence as the computer

made the billions of decisions necessary to attempt a translation at

this uncertain point. Finally, a string of sounds emerged, faithful

imitations of the aliens' voices, at least to Kirk's ear. The reaction

was instantaneous. The tallest alien, the one who had refused most

recently to talk to the other two, released a truncated version of the

same keening wail he had made when first awakened. For a moment it

looked as if he were about to fall, and the other two had to support

him, one on each arm. He recovered quickly, however, and harshly

repeated the single syllable that was the only intentional sound he had

so far uttered. After another pause, the computer, simulating a generic

human male voice, translated. "Be silent." Ignoring McCoy's muttered "I

could have told you that, Jim," Kirk spoke again into the translator.

"You do not need to be silent or try to keep any secrets from us. We are

not your enemies." Obediently but still slowly, the computer translated,

and for a moment it looked as if the tallest alien were trying to locate

the precise source of the voice and hurl himself at it. Ignoring the

tallest alien's protests, the one who had tried to strangle Kirk

responded. More quickly this time, the computer supplied a translation,

highlighting every third word or so with a faint tone, indicating that

those words were, in effect, still only educated guesses. "What you have

shown us does prove that you are not our enemy," the alien began, but

then the other broke in harshly. "It does not matter that he is not the

enemy," the computer translated. "The fact that our speech is known to

anyone could lead to our destruction." "Who is this enemy you speak

of?." Kirk asked when the computer fell silent. "Were those his ships

that first attacked our own ship and then yours?" "Did you think they

were our friends?" the tallest one sneered, apparently having given up

his attempt to

maintain silence. "They are no one's friend! They have already destroyed

a thousand worlds and will continue as long as worlds exist to destroy."

Half turning toward Spock, Kirk briefly lowered the translator. "Bring

back the images of the planets we've visited so far," he said quietly.

Spock, nodding almost imperceptibly, leaned closer into the science

station. Speaking barely above a whisper, he addressed the computer,

then looked toward the viewscreen as the images began. As the first of

the fused planetary surfaces appeared on the screen, Kirk spoke again

into the translator. "Are these some of the worlds your enemy has

destroyed?" The aliens watched in silence as a dozen incinerated worlds

flowed across the screen. Then the tallest one spoke. "These are the

ones you displayed for us before. I do not know that they are the worlds

I personally have seen, but they bear the unmistakable mark of the

Destroyers." For a moment, Kirk thought of trying to explain that, not

only had these worlds been destroyed tens of thousands of years ago, but

much of the destruction was simply beyond the capability of the ships of

either of the warring groups. That, however, could easily lead their

guests to conclude that more advanced ships--such as the

Enterprise--were responsible. "How many such worlds are there?" he asked

instead. "No one can know," the alien replied. "We know of none in this

part of space that have not been visited by the Destroyers." "Then your

world is not nearby?" The question brought total silence from all three

aliens, not just the tallest one. "I apologize," Kirk said quickly. "I

realize that you do not dare reveal any information about the location

of your world for fear that it might enable your enemy to find you."

"That is correct," the shortest one said, and then

added in what could have been an apologetic manner. "We believe you when

you say you are not our enemy, but belief is not enough in a matter as

vital as this." "I understand," Kirk said. "The location of your world

is not important to us. But can you tell us what you call yourself?."

"We are the Hoshan," the computer translated the reply, indicating by an

accompanying tone that the word "Hoshan" was, as Kirk had expected, the

computer's humanized version of the actual sounds made by the alien. It

would do the same in the other direction when it had to translate

"human" or "vulcan" or any proper name into the Hoshan language. "And

yourselves? Your own personal names?" When the Hoshan glanced quickly at

each other, saying nothing, Kirk went on, "My name is James Kirk. As you

guessed earlier, I am in command of this vessel. And this," he added,

gesturing toward Spock, "is Mr. Spock, my second in command." Slowly, he

continued around the bridge, giving the names of everyone there.

Finally, the tallest of the Hoshan spoke. "Are we to be released, James

Kirk?" he asked, holding up his still manacled wrists. Kirk glanced at

the security team and their drawn phasers. Then he nodded. "Very well,"

he said. "Lieutenant Tomson?" Hesitating only a fraction of a second,

the security chief tapped the release code into her control unit. When

the manacles fell from the Hoshans' wrists, she quickly retrieved them.

"Now," Kirk said, "will you tell us your names?" "I am Tarasek," the

tallest one said, the computer seeming to insert vowels in what

otherwise would have been altogether unpronounceable. "I was in command

of the vessel that was lost." "I am Radzyk," the second said, adding

nothing. The third, the one who had tried to strangle Kirk, met his eyes

squarely. "I am Boiduc," he said. "I regret that our earlier actions

have caused you and your crew member injury, and I thank you for your

kind treatment." "We understand your reasons. In any event, I was not

harmed, and Nurse Garcia, whose arm was damaged when your comrade died,

will recover." Pausing, Kirk looked toward the forward view-screen,

where the four enemy ships maintained their steady pace, still retracing

the path of the first ship the Enterprise had encountered. "Now, what

can you tell us of this enemy you have spoken of?." "There is little we

know to tell," Bolduc said. "We have seen only his ships and what he has

done with them. As you can imagine, none of his race has allowed itself

to be captured alive, nor have we been able to obtain even a body for

study. Our knowledge is limited to knowledge of his actions, which we

know all too well. He has slaughtered many thousands of our people and

would slaughter us all if given the chance." "But why? Why does he want

to kill y ou? How did this war between you begin?" "You have twice shown

us what the Destroyers have done to countless planets," Tarasek broke

in, "and still you can ask such a question?" Except, Kirk thought again,

this particular enemy hadn't done any of what they had seen so far. He

still did not want to get into that particular bucket of worms, however.

"I only meant," he said, "how did you first come in contact with the

Destroyers?" "They attacked us, of course," Tarasek said, "just as they

attacked you." "There was no attempt at communication? By either of

you?" "As you yourselves have seen, the Destroyers communicate only with

their weapons." "But your people did try?" "I cannot speak for the first

two ships that were attacked. At that time we knew nothing of the

Destroyers or the worlds they had obliterated, so those first ships

undoubtedly did make an attempt. If they

had the time. We know only that they ceased to exist. Their subspace

beacons, which linked them to the nearest colony world, simply stopped

transmitting." "How did you discover they had been attacked, then?" "If

you require a living Hoshan to bear witness for you, there is none. Our

ships of that time were built for exploration, not for war! They could

not stand up to the Destroyers' weapons. Those first two were almost

certainly totally destroyed, vaporized. If they had not been--if any of

the crew had survived, or any of their charts-we would not be here

today. Our colonies and our home world would have been found and

destroyed generations ago." "And then?" Kirk prompted when Tarasek fell

into a brooding silence. "And then," he continued, his voice suddenly

sounding more tired than angry, although the computer's bland

translation was unaffected by this change, "a third ship was attacked.

This one, however, was in subspace communication with a colony world

more than a parsec away. Before it was destroyed, it was able to

transmit an image of its attacker and a description of everything that

happened until the moment of destruction. Those images and that

description are a central part of every Hoshan's earliest education."

"What did you do once you knew these Destroyers existed?" "At first, not

knowing the extent of their power, we did little but avoid the sector of

space where the attacks had occurred. But then one of our colony worlds

was destroyed. Hundreds of thousands of Hoshan were killed. Shortly

after, we began to find those other worlds that had been destroyed in

the past. At that point, we realized we had little choice in the matter.

We knew we were no match for the Destroyers and their planet-killing

weapons. Our only chance for survival lay in remaining hidden from them

while we developed our own weapons, our own defenses. We had to retreat

from space altogether, evacuating our colonies and destroying anything

we could not take back with us. For decades, then, we worked only on our

defenses. We constructed fleets of warships to match theirs, and we

turned our planetary system into a fortress. Now, finally, after

generations of sacrifice, we have grown strong enough to return to

space, to begin seeking them out." Though the computer's translation was

neutral in tone, the intensity of feeling was more than evident in the

Hoshan's own voice. "But even after all this time, you still don't know

why they attacked you in the first place?" Kirk asked quietly. "Why they

destroyed your worlds and your ships?" "Ask them, if you dare." "if we

get the chance, we will," Kirk said, noting that the translations had

become virtually instantaneous, with the tone indicating uncertainty

accompanying less than one word in ten. "You still have them there

before you," Tarasek said, gesturing at the viewscreen, where the

real-time image of the star field and the four alien ships were still on

display. "Can you not steal them from their ships as you stole us from

ours?" "It would be considerably more difficult. When we took you from

your ship, you had no functional weapons and no shields." "That is true,

but the Destroyers' weapons do not appear to have any effect on your

vessel. If we are to believe everything that you have shown us." "When

our shields are up, that is true. They must be briefly lowered, however,

if we are to take you or anyone else from your ships in that manner."

"So, you are not invincible?" "Far from it," "Kirk said, hoping that he

was not making a mistake in continuing to be so open. "And there are

other ships like yours?" "Many, but they are not here, in this region of

space." "Where, then? I could not help but notice that none

of the scenes you so effectively displayed for us gave any indication of

where your home world is located." "Believe me," Kirk said with a rueful

shake of his head, "there is little I would like better than to be able

to show you precisely where our home world is. Unfortunately, we do not

know where it is." "You do not know where your own home world is? Your

ship has transported you so very far?" "Unfortunately, it was not our

ship that transported US." "What, then? What scientific magic do you

control in addition to this ship of yours?" "Whatever it was that

brought us here, we did not control it. It was as much magic to us as it

would be to you." "And what might this magic be?" Turning his eyes

toward the science station, Kirk said, "Mr. Spock, show our friends here

how we arrived." "As you wish, Captain." A few brief instructions to the

computer, and the sparse stars of the Sagittarius arm of the Milky Way

galaxy appeared on the screen. In the distance was the denser band of

the Orion arm. "This is our home galaxy," Kirk said, feeling the words

tug at his throat. "Our home planets--we are not all from the same

one--are somewhere in that band of stars across the screen." A luminous

circle appeared at a point in the Orion arm, and Spock's voice said,

"The Federation is there, gentlemen." "Thank you, Mr. Spock." "Then you

do know where your world is," Tarasek said. "In one sense, we do," Kirk

said. "However, we don't know where we are right now. Just watch the

screen, and you will see how we came here." All eyes, Hoshan and crew

alike, were glued to the screen until, without warning, with only the

briefest tremor of distortion, the scattered stars of the Milky

Way galaxy were replaced by the glowing curtain of stars that had

surrounded the Enterprise since that moment of transition. For several

seconds there was only silence. Finally, Tarasek said, "It happened that

quickly?" "It happened that quickly. I believe our computer analysis

showed the actual transition period to have been approximately

ninety-eight microseconds." Kirk smiled. "Correct, Mr. Spock?"

"Precisely, Captain. During that period, we were, for lack of a better

term, in limbo. The sensors detected literally nothing, neither matter

nor energy, not even that of the Enterprise itself." "Thank you, Mr.

Spock. Now show them what happened to the one probe we sent back through

the gate before it vanished." The computer, responding directly to

Captain Kirk's voice, complied. Tarasek's eyes narrowed. "You are saying

that you simply vanished from somewhere in your own galaxy and appeared

here?" "That is what I am saying," Kirk confirmed. "And this gate that

you came through---why can you not simply return through it?" "It has

vanished. For all we know, it could still be nearby, but we haven't been

able to find it." "But it could still be here, lurking anywhere, and

even you could not detect its presence?" "Not unless we sent a probe

through it. Or simply ran into it ourselves." "And more such gates could

exist? Gates that could make our ships disappear as easily as they do

yours?" "I have no reason to doubt it." Kirk paused, looking from one to

the other. "Have some of your ships disappeared in this way? Without

having a chance to transmit the customary description of their

attackers?" "Description? What description?" Tarasek bridled. "Shortly

before the battle, we observed and recorded highly compressed subspace

broadcasts made

both by you and by one of the Destroyer ships. Also, prior to attacking

us, the first Destroyer ship that we encountered made a similar

broadcast, containing an image of our own ship. We have assumed this is

standard procedure for any ship about to go into battle." When none of

the Hoshan spoke, Kirk went on. "In fact, your own broadcast was very

helpful to our ship's computer in learning to speak your language.

However, you need not be concerned. Neither signal gave us the slightest

hint as to the location of your home worlds." Still there was silence,

but then Boiduc, the Hoshan who had first begun to speak willingly,

said, "You are right. We always transmit as much information as possible

before going into battle, though we were not aware that the Destroyers

did so as well. You are also right when you suggest that some of our own

ships have disappeared without warning. We have assumed until now that

their transmitters malfunctioned or that the Destroyers had been able

somehow to take them unawares. These gates of yours, however, would be a

less worrisome explanation." "They aren't our gates," Kirk emphasized.

"We discovered them only recently and were trying to learn more about

them when we were suddenly transported here, who knows how many millions

of parsecs from home." "You would have us believe that you are alone

here?" Tarasek asked. "With no possibility of returning to your homes?"

"Our only hope is to find the gate that brought us here. At the moment,

the odds do not look good, but we haven't given up hope." "And us? What

do you want of us?" Tarasek continued, seeming more skeptical by the

moment. "Why have you shown us all these things? Why do you openly

confess your problems and weaknesses to us?" "Because we hoped that, if

we demonstrated our

trust in you, you might come to trust us, at least a little." The Hoshan

made a rasping sound deep in his throat as his eyes swept across the

security details drawn phasers. "It is easy to trust those who are your

prisoners and have no opportunity to betray you. If you truly wish us to

trust you," he added, his eyes locking with Kirk's, "use your great ship

to help us wipe out the Destroyers."

Chapter Ten

DR. CRANDALL HAD barely seated himself at the conference table with Kirk

and the three Enterprise senior officers when a scowling Dr. McCoy said,

"It seems clear enough to me, Jim. There's no doubt that the Hoshan need

our help." "And you think we should give it to them, Bones?" Kirk asked,

settling into the chair at the head of the table. "You're darned right I

do!" "Reasons?" "How many reasons do you need, Jim? They attacked us the

second they realized we existed. They did the same with the Hoshan.

They've been doing it with the Hoshan for at least a hundred years!" "If

we believe everything the Hoshan tell us." "And you don't?" "As a matter

of fact, I do," Kirk said. "But the important part is what they didn't

tell us. Or weren't able to tell us. The reasons the Destroyers attacked

them." McCoy shook his head in exasperation as he slumped back in his

chair. "Sheer cussedness is reason enough for me. These Destroyers are

the local version of the Klingons. They like to fight, and they like to

kill." "You could be right, Doctor," Spock said, "but that hypothesis

does not take into account many of the obliterated worlds we saw. The

so-called Destroyers

do not have phaser technology, and yet several of the worlds were

destroyed by phaser fire. Are you suggesting their race possessed the

technology thousands of years ago but lost it in the meantime?" "Just

because the six ships we've seen so far didn't have phasers doesn't mean

they don't exist! Besides, it doesn't matter who destroyed those other

worlds. That happened ages ago. This is happening now, and we've seen

how these people operate! The Hoshan call them Destroyers, and that's

exactly what they are!" "However, Doctor," Spock countered, "we have not

seen the people themselves, nor have we been able to speak with them and

ask the reasons for their behavior. Under such circumstances, I find it

difficult to logically determine the truth of the situation." "There are

times, Spock," McCoy snapped, "when you don't need logic to know what

the truth is!" "Possible, Doctor, but I very much doubt that this is

such a time." "Scotty," Kirk said, interrupting another angry retort by

McCoy, "any opinions?" "Aye, Captain, more than plenty, but no' a one

that comes with a guarantee. If it were no' for Mr. Spock's sensor

readings, I would ha' my doubts that anything living was even on board

those ships. Even Klingons do not automatically destroy themselves and

their ships the instant they are defeated, and certainly not when there

is every chance that they could still be rescued by their comrades."

"Mr. Spock?" Kirk turned to the science officer. "Any possibility of

error in the life form readings? Could the Destroyer ships be totally

automated? Programmed to destroy?" "Possible but highly unlikely. The

readings indicated conscious, humanoid life forms. And do not forget

that the Hoshan performed in a markedly similar fashion." "True," Kirk

said, "but the Hoshan ship was alone, with no chance of rescue that the

crew knew of. And they had a reason for the suicide and the destruction

of

their ships. If they were captured alive or their ship taken intact, the

location of their home world would be in jeopardy. Under similar

circumstances, facing an enemy that could wipe out earth, I can imagine

doing the same to the Enterprise. These so-called Destroyers, if we are

to believe the Hoshan, have never had any such reason for similar fears.

And with four of their fellows looking on, those two certainly had no

such reasons. If they themselves had not ended their own lives and their

ships had not automatically destroyed themselves, there was no reason

they could not have been rescued by the remaining four ships." "Who can

say what their fears are, Captain?" Spock said. "Without speaking with

them, none of us here can do that, nor can the Hoshan. And all too often

among races which, like your own, are not ruled by logic, fears need to

be neither rational nor logical in order to be real. It was one of your

human philosophers, I believe, who spoke of the possibility that fear

itself was sometimes the only thing that one might have to fear." "A

politician, not a philosopher," Kirk said, "but your point is well

taken, Mr. Spock. Dr. Crandall? Any thoughts from the civilian

viewpoint?" "I'm afraid not, Captain Kirk. Contacting new civilizations,

even under normal conditions, is not my area of expertise. I'm more than

happy to leave it in your capable hands." Kirk suppressed a grimace,

wondering if he had been right to invite Crandall, ostensibly as a

representative of the Council, to participate in the meeting. After

those first few days of imperious demands and constant criticism,

Crandall had done a complete about-face, apparently totally conquering

the fear that had driven him at first. Ever since, he had been the soul

of cooperation, at least on the surface. Everything he did, every word

he spoke, seemed aimed at wiping out the memory of those early

outbursts, of establishing himself as reasonable and cooperative and

understanding. Kirk, however, was not at all sure he didn't prefer the

earlier version. At least you knew where he stood. With this new,

oily-smooth, anything-to-help facade, there wasn't even a glimmer of

certainty. And the man was everywhere. Dropping in on the bridge.

Roaming the corridors and chatting with the crew, sometimes even shaking

hands as if he were on a planetside campaign trail. It wouldn't surprise

Kirk to find him cozying up to the Hoshan, now that the language problem

had been licked. "All right, then," Kirk said, turning back to the

others, "except for Dr. McCoy, we agree that we need to know more before

taking sides. The question is, how do we go about it? Scotty, what about

the Hoshan suggestion? Could we use the transporters to snatch someone

from a Destroyer ship? Could we do it fast enough to keep from getting

blasted before we can get our deflectors back up?" "You could disable

the ship first," McCoy said. "And have them blow themselves up instead

of us? From our limited experience so far, they seem to be even quicker

on the self-destruct trigger than the Hoshan." Kirk smiled faintly and

then added, "It's too bad we can't set the ship's phasers to stun, as we

can the hand phasers. That might take care of our problem. But how about

it, Scotty? If we approach one of the ships the same way we approached

the disabled Hoshan ship, would we be able to lock the transporters onto

the crew fast enough?" "It depends on how quickly they react. We can

try. If it does no' work--and if we can get the deflectors back up in

time---we can try to think of something else." "Very well, gentlemen,"

Kirk said, standing, "unless one of us comes up with something better

before the next watch, that's it."

Lost in thought, Dr. Jason Crandall walked slowly down the corridor

toward his stateroom. The situation was changing far too rapidly for his

liking. His plans,

his campaign, required time, a great deal of undisturbed time. He could

not afford the turmoil and the distractions that the Hoshan and their

problems presented. Without the necessary time, it would be virtually

impossible for him to build the kind of trust among the crew that would

be required if he were to have any hope of success when he eventually

evoked the name of the Federation Council and challenged Kirk openly and

directly. And challenging Kirk was not, he had decided in the last few

days, as impossible a task as he had first feared. After his first chat

with Ensign Davis, he had talked to dozens more of the crew, even a few

of the officers, cautiously sounding them out, looking for areas of

vulnerability, areas in which he could influence them. Somewhat to his

surprise, he had found that Kirk's obvious popularity, even charisma,

did not always translate into blind faith in his every decision.

Virtually everyone on board knew of the dozens of hair's-breadth escapes

the Enterprise had undergone since he had taken command. Most had

participated in several, and, despite their admiration and respect for

the captain, there was often an undertone of doubt in their voices, even

of uneasiness, that the Enterprise should have been allowed to fall into

so many hazardous situations in the first place. There were even some

who made sour comments about Kirk's reputation--of which even Crandall

himself had been aware---as a l ady's man, but since no one could point

to an instance where it had affected his performance as captain,

Crandall dismissed them primarily as the result of envy. Even so, the

names of those who had made the comments were filed in Crandall's

growing bank of information. But then, just as Crandall felt he was

beginning to make real progress, not only with the crew in general but

with some of the officers, most notably with Lieutenant Jameson, the

third-watch science officer, the Hoshan had been brought aboard. At

first, after Nurse Garcia's injuries and the Hoshan's adamant refusal to

speak, even among themselves, Crandall had thought the whole incident

could be turned to his advantage. After all, Kirk had risked the ship in

a foolhardy maneuver to snatch the Hoshan aboard, and a well-liked

member of the medical department had been seriously injured. Also, if it

had taken just a few seconds longer to lock the transporters onto the

Hoshan, or if the overload in the Hoshan ship's anti-matter power

generators had been induced at only a fractionally faster rate than

Spock had calculated, it wouldn't have been just the Garcia woman who

would have been injured. The entire Enterprise and everyone aboard would

have been vaporized. And for what? To save the lives of four

comparatively barbaric aliens who wanted nothing more than an instant

death that allowed them to take as many non-Hoshan as possible with

them. But then McCoy had patched Garcia up, and Kirk had gotten the

aliens talking, leaving Crandall with nothing more than a litany of

what-if's. Or so he had thought until the meeting today. After listening

to McCoy's angry objections, he had begun to wonder if his plan to build

a power base among the regular crew was the most effective alternative.

He would have to study the other officers further, particularly the

noncommittal Mr. Scott, who seemed more devoted to the Enterprise itself

than to any human aboard it. It was obvious, however, that no love was

lost between Kirk and his chief medical officer. McCoy's remarks, made

on the record and before not only the other officers but Crandall

himself, a civilian observer, were the sort that, in Crandall's mind,

verged on open mutiny. He should have paid closer attention to the rift

before, he told himself irritably. It had been there for him to see, if

only he had paid attention, when the aliens were first being brought

aboard. McCoy had openly defied Kirk then, too, in full hearing not only

of other officers but of several members of the crew. And nothing had

been done about it either time,

which might say something about the captain, something that Crandall

could find useful. A captain who was slow to clamp down on an officer

who defied him might also be slow to clamp down on others who defied

him. At first, remembering the way Kirk had had him forcibly removed

from the bridge, Crandall had assumed that the captain was quick and

calm in his decisions. But now he wondered if that first time could have

been an anomaly, a panic reaction to the circumstances of the moment.

Unable to cope with the distraction that Crandall had presented, Kirk

had had the distraction removed. Even the "rescue" of the Hoshan could

be seen in that light--a spur-of-the-moment action that had, despite a

disastrous beginning, turned out to his advantage in the long run. And

both incidents would, Crandall thought, fit his newly emerging image of

Captain Kirk, an image that was almost diametrically opposed to what he

had first believed. Kirk no longer seemed the carefree adventurer

Crandall had first imagined him to be. Instead, he now appeared to

Crandall to be as frightened as anyone else on board, himself included,

and his command decisions had been bad-even disastrous--not because of

any desire to play explorer but because Kirk was, under his artificially

calm exterior, panicked out of his mind, grasping at whatever straws

came within his reach. The first straw had been the gate itself, and

when that had vanished, he had grasped at the even flimsier straw of the

imaginary race that had "built" the gates. But then, when the Hoshan and

their enemies had appeared, he had once again switched direction, though

what he hoped to gain from his current course of action Crandall

couldn't imagine. Now that he had managed to establish communications

with the Hoshan, his course should have been obvious. He should have

promised to help the Hoshan, not from the altruistic motives that the

ship's doctor professed but from a simpler, more practical motive. If

they helped the Hoshan, then the Hoshan would be in their debt, and

virtually everyone on the Enterprise could, if they played their cards

right, end up on the receiving end of more gratitude than they could use

up in a lifetime. Kirk's fence-sitting act, however, could rob them of

that chance forever. On the other hand, Crandall thought, perhaps Kirk's

inability to make a decision to help the Hoshan was just the opportunity

he himself could make the most of. If he could somehow turn the tables

on Kirk, forcing him to do the sensible thing--or if he could at least

be seen by the Hoshan as having forced Kirk to come to his senses...

Yes, he thought with an almost invisible smile as he reached his

stateroom, it did bear thinking about. However, despite his dislike for

acting on the spur of the moment, he would also have to be constantly on

the lookout for opportunity and be constantly ready to act, quickly and

decisively. Considering the rate at which events were moving, he could

well have only one chance, and he dared not pass it up.

"Locked on, sir!" the voice crackled from the bridge intercom.

"Seven-point-four seconds, Captain," Spock announced. Kirk frowned.

"You're positive, Mr. Spock?" "Of course, Captain." "Of course," Kirk

repeated, the frown altering into a rueful smile. "I gather that we may

have reached the point of diminishing returns that you and Dr. McCoy

warned me of." "Precisely." "Reached and passed it!" McCoy's gravelly

voice snapped from behind the command chair where he stood. "The last

ten simulations haven't varied as much as half a second." "Point taken,

Bones. And Ensign McPhee did beat Scotty's best time byrewhat was it,

Spock?" "One-point-two seconds, Captain."

"We're as ready as we're ever going to be, Jim," McCoy said. "So unless

you come to your senses and change your mind--" "Keptin!" Chekov's voice

broke in. "Another ship, bearing one-twenty-seven, mark sixteen I" "Get

it on the screen, Mr. Sulu," Kirk snapped. "Maximum magnification!"

"Already done, sir," the helmsman acknowledged. "Mr. Spock, Hoshan or

Destroyer?" The tiny dot on the screen was indistinguishable from the

four it had replaced. "It matches neither profile perfectly, Captain.

There are seven life forms on board, and it is traveling at warp

one-point-eight." "Security," Kirk said, stabbing at the buttons on the

arm of the command chair, "bring the Hoshan to the bridge, immediately

I" "if it maintains its present course and speed," Spock said,

correlating Chekov's readings with a dozen from his own instruments,

"the new ship will be within sensor range of the Destroyer ships in

approximately ten-point-six minutes, Captain." "Weapons, Mr. Spock?"

"Similar to both Hoshan and Destroyer ships, Captain. The antimatter

core, however, appears to be capable of greater output than either."

"Dilithium crystals?" "Negative, Captain, simply a larger engine. The

level of technology is no more advanced in this ship than in any other

we have encountered here." "Lieutenant Uhura, any subspace radio

activity?" "None, Captain. This one is maintaining as low a profile as

the others." "Spock, you can't refine the life form readings enough to

distinguish between Hoshan and Destroyer?" "Negative. Readings show all

ships are occupied by humanoid life forms--that is all." The turbolift

door hissed open, and the three

Hoshan lurched onto the bridge, followed closely by Lieutenant Tomson

and two other security guards. "Get us closer, Mr. Sulu, maximum warp

factor. I want a decent picture on that viewscreen." "Done, Captain."

The power channeled to the drive engines seemed to pulse through the

bridge as the image on the viewscreen shifted dizzyingly and swept

toward the dot at its center. Within seconds, the dot expanded into a

featureless hexagon. Like the others, it appeared to be a massive

warp-drive unit fastened to a heavily shielded crew compartment. "One of

yours, Tarasek?" Kirk asked, glancing toward the Hoshan. "Or one of

theirs? Boiduc? Rad-zyk?" "Eight minutes to sensor range, Captain,"

Spock said. "Quick, Tarasek!" Kirk snapped. "One of yours? If so, it

will be detected by the four Destroyer ships in less than eight

minutes." "Yes, it is Hoshan!" Bolduc said. "Will you help us now, James

Kirk?" Tarasek asked sharply. "How? By attacking the four Destroyer

ships?" "Of course! Even without your help, at least three will be

destroyed! The Hoshan ship you see there is more powerful than our own,

and we eliminated two Destroyers ourselves before our own destruction!"

"He's right, Jim," McCoy said. "If we don't do anything, there's going

to be another slaughter out there. The Hoshan ship may be able to take

two or three of the Destroyer ships with it, but it will be destroyed,

too! You have to help them!" "For what it's worth, Captain, I agree,"

Sulu said, an unusual intensity in his voice. "I've heard all the

arguments for holding back until we've been able to talk to both sides,

but I've seen what the Destroyers have done." "And I, sir!" Chekov said

quickly.

"This is not a democracy, gentlemen. Mr. Sulu, put US----" "Captain

Kirk!" A new voice, harsh and commanding, overrode Kirk's voice and the

sounds of the ship, and it was only when everyone turned, startled,

toward the back of the bridge that it became clear that it had come from

Dr. Crandall, who now stood next to the security detail and held one of

their phasers, its force setting almost at maximum, its muzzle aimed

directly at Kirk.

Chapter Eleven

FOR WHAT SEEMED like forever, there was total silence except for the

distinctive electronic sounds of the Enterprise itself, and Dr. Jason

Crandall had to pull in a deep breath to try to calm himself. Had he, in

this impulsive move, picked the right moment? Or had he miscalculated?

For days, he had watched for an opportunity, half hoping one would not

present itself, but now it had. For more than an hour, he had wandered

unobtrusively about the bridge, watching impatiently as simulation after

simulation had been run, first with Chief Engineer Scott at the distant

transporter controls, then with various of his assistants. As far as

Crandall was concerned, the point of diminishing returns Kirk had

alluded to had been reached before the simulations had ever been

started. Kirk, unable to make the obvious decision--to help the

Hoshan--had been manufacturing one delaying tactic after another for

more than three days, with these ridiculous simulations being only the

latest. Even those crew members who had come closest to openly

criticizing the captain for his "recklessness" in allowing the

Enterprise to be drawn too easily into dangerous situations in the past

were becoming impatient now that they had all heard the story of the

Hoshan. Like Dr. McCoy, they felt there was nothing to be gained by

waiting, certainly nothing to be gained by risking the entire Enterprise

in an effort to snatch one or more of the Destroyers from the heart of a

fully functional Destroyer ship.

Crandall had been on the verge of leaving the bridge, perhaps to talk

once again with the Hoshan, when the new ship had appeared, and now,

with all eyes turned toward him, he almost wished he had left. But he

hadn't. Instead, he had stayed, and he had heard McCoy once again urge

an attack on the Destroyers. And then, when the helmsman had for the

first time come down openly on McCoy's side, he had decided. It was now

or never. He had already spoken with enough of the crew to know that he

and McCoy were far from alone in their feelings about the Destroyers. He

had even spoken with the Hoshan themselves, who, while craftily

refraining from making any outright commitments while still on the

Enterprise, had made it clear that they would see to it that his efforts

on their behalf would be fully recognized and rewarded once they were

back on Hoshan worlds. And so he had acted, snatching a phaser from

Ensign Creighton, who, though alert for Hoshan moves, had never

suspected that Crandall presented a threat. Hastily Crandall had thumbed

the force setting well above the stun range Creighton had been using.

"Dr. Crandal!!" Kirk began, but Crandall waved him to silence with a

quick jerk of the phaser. "As a representative of the Federation

Council, Captain Kirk," Crandall said, enunciating his words slowly and

carefully, "I hereby relieve you and Mr. Spock of command of the

Enterprise. Dr. McCoy, as next most senior officer present, you are to

assume command. And if you are to take advantage of the situation, I

would suggest you order Mr. Sulu to prepare immediately to fire on the

Destroyer ships. And tell security to escort the captain and his first

officer to their quarters!" "Now just a blasted minute---" McCoy began,

but a quick shake of the head from Kirk and a glance at the phaser's

force setting silenced him. Crandall acknowledged Kirk's intervention.

"A wise man knows when to accept the inevitable, Captain."

"All right," McCoy said hesitantly after a moment of blinking silence,

"let's do things sensibly for a change. Mr. Sulu, you heard Dr.

Crandall. Prepare to fire. Lieutenant Tomson," he added, looking toward

the security chief, "be prepared to escort the captain and Mr. Spock to

their quarters as Dr. Crandall suggested." As he spoke, McCoy put his

hand on Kirk's wrist in what Crandall saw as an apologetic gesture. Kirk

stood up slowly from the command chair. "I hope you know what you're

doing, Bones," he said, slumping as he stepped down and moved toward

Crandall and the security detail. "Mr. Spock?" With only a slight

arching of his eyebrows, Spock turned from the science station and

followed Kirk, his hands raised roughly to shoulder level in the face of

the leveled phaser. Crandall stepped back out of his way, his grip

tightening on the weapon. "Everything is under control, Dr. Crandall,"

McCoy said, still standing to one side of the command chair. "However,

there's something you should see, there, on the viewscreen." "What?"

Crandall frowned. "I see only the Hoshan ship." "There," McCoy said, "in

the corner of the screen. Mr. Sulu, bring that object to the center of

the screen, maximum magnification." With a darting glance toward McCoy,

Sulu turned sharply back to the viewscreen, his fingers playing rapidly

across the controls. An instant later, the image on the screen shifted,

the Hoshan ship sliding off the upper left corner. "I still don't see

anything!" Crandall snapped impatiently. "Look more closely," McCoy

said. "There," Sulu said, raising his finger to point at a spot near the

center of the screen. "Right there." Squinting, Crandall took a step

forward. "There's nothing--" he began, but suddenly he was silent,

slumping to the deck as Spock's fingers closed

precisely on the junction of his neck and shoulder. Kirk caught the

phaser, unfired, as it tumbled from Crandall's l imp fingers. "Good

work, Bones, Mr. Sulu," Kirk said. "Spock is apparently not the only

member of the crew with a touch of telepathy." "Just common sense, Jim.

Once you gave us a chance to see the way he had his phaser set, we knew

we couldn't allow it to be fired. Even if it missed us all, it could've

wiped out half the controls. And there was only one way to overpower him

quickly and quietly enoughinto distract him and let Spock's magic

fingers take over." Spock, glancing briefly sideways at McCoy at the

word "magic," was already back at the science station. "Three-point-four

minutes to sensor range, Captain." "Right," Kirk said, striding toward

the command chair. "Security, take Dr. Crandall back to his quarters.

Leave the Hoshan here, but keep watch on them." Already the Hoshan ship

was again centered in the viewscreen. "Mr. Sulu, lay in a course that

takes us directly across the path of the Hoshan ship, behind it but

within its sensor range. Get us within sensor range as quickly as

possible, but once there, don't exceed warp two. And keep our deflectors

up." "Aye-aye, Captain." "Two-point-nine minutes, Captain," Spock

announced as the Enterprise surged forward. "Decoy duty, Jim?" McCoy

asked, shaking his head. "That's the general idea, Bones." "You may lose

the Destroyers." "Once we get the Hoshan out of their way, we can come

back to them. Unless they change their course while we're gone."

"Two-point-three minutes, Captain." Kirk glanced briefly toward his

science officer, then

turned to the communications station. "Lieutenant Uhura, tight-beam

directional transmission. Send a randomly modulated subspace carrier

directly at the Hoshan ship. Scan up and down the spectrum until you get

their attention." "Aye-aye, sir." "Two minutes, Captain." For another

thirty seconds, the only sound was Uhura's fingers as they danced across

her control panels. Then, abruptly, the image of the Hoshan ship flipped

on its axis, turning nearly a hundred and eighty degrees. "Maximum power

drain on Hoshan antimatter generator, Captain." "Not heading for

overload, I hope." "Negative, Captain. It is simply supplying the power

needed to allow them to make the same kind of U-turn that was made by

the Destroyer ship that we first encountered. And its weapons are

preparing to fire." "So," Kirk said, turning to look at the Hoshan, "the

Destroyers are not the only ones who attack on sight." "We have never

said otherwise," Tarasek said. "You know our reasons." "Whoever is on

this ship, do they speak the same language as you?" Kirk asked. "Would

they be able to understand us?" "They will understand, but they will not

listen." "Tarasek, you were the commander of your vessel. If you were to

speak to them, they would certainly listen." Kirk paused, his eyes

narrowing as he watched the alien's face. "Particularly," he went on

deliberately, "if you transmitted the proper identification code."

"Code? What code is this you speak of?" "Whatever code Hoshan ships use

to recognize other Hoshan ships. We have a record of what your ship

transmitted when you first became aware of the presence of the Destroyer

ships. We don't, however,

know what the required response is, since the Destroyers obviously

didn't make it." Kirk paused, watching Tarasek digest the information.

"You are right," the Hoshan finally admitted. "Such recognition codes

exist. When an unknown ship is detected, a challenge is issued, and if

the proper response is not received, it is assumed that the ship is a

Destroyer." "And you can show us how to produce the proper response?"

"We cannot. Both challenges and responses are controlled by the ship's

computers, and both change from hour to hour. No crew members possess

this knowledge." Kirk grimaced. "You don't take any chances, do you?"

"Would you, under such conditions?" "Perhaps not. But you're saying

that, without the proper interaction between the computer on this ship

and the one on that Hoshan ship out there, communication is impossible?"

"Not impossible, only pointless. They will receive whatever you

broadcast, but they will not listen. They will not believe." "Not even

if they hear your voice? You couldn't convince them we are not

Destroyers but friends? Even though we do not return fire?" "What would

you have me say to convince them, James Kirk?" "You could tell them the

truth, that you have found an ally in your war against the Destroyers."

"But you have refused to be our ally." Kirk grimaced in exasperation.

"We have only refused to shoot the Destroyers down before we find a way

of communicating with them." "Thirty seconds until we are within range

of the Hoshan ship's weapons, Captain," Spock said. "It has increased

its speed to warp two-point-three." "Thank you for the reminder, Mr.

Spock. Mr. Sulu,

take us directly away from the Destroyer ships, and keep us just outside

the range of the Hoshan weapons." "Aye-aye, sir." "So," Kirk said,

turning back to the Hoshan, "according to you, meaningful communication

with your people is impossible." "Unless you demonstrate your friendship

toward the Hoshan, I am sure it is." "And the only way to demonstrate

that friendship is to wipe out a few Destroyer ships?" The computer did

not pick up Kirk's sarcasm as it translated for the Hoshan. "I know of

no other way," Tarasek admitted. "And even that would prove it only to

you, the three of you on board the Enterprise. How could we go about

proving it to anyone else? Would we have to make sure a suitable number

of Hoshan ships had a ringside seat for the destruction?" Kirk broke

off, shaking his head angrily. "Security, escort our guests back to

their quarters." Standing up as the turbolift door hissed shut behind

the Hoshan and their guards, Kirk stepped forward and glanced over

Sulu's shoulder at the controls, then at the viewscreen and the Hoshan

ship in its center. "Maintaining specified separation, sir," Sulu

volunteered as Kirk turned away. "I didn't doubt it, Mr. Sulu. But I

think we've carried this on long enough. Our initial objective of

keeping that particular ship from running into the Destroyers has been

accomplished. Mr. Spock, are the Destroyer ships still within sensor

range?" "Affirmative. Course and speed remain unchanged." "Very well.

Mr. Sulu, ahead warp factor six until we are safely out of Hoshan sensor

range, then double back and resume our tracking of the Destroyers."

"Aye-aye, Captain." As the Hoshan ship began to shrink on the screen,

Kirk turned to McCoy, still standing near the handrail not far from the

elevator. "Bones," he said, "I think we had better have a talk with Dr.

Crandall."

It was a thoroughly chastened, almost trembling Dr. Crandall that Kirk

and McCoy found in his quarters, "I--I don't know what came over me," he

said, even before the door had closed behind them. "I didn't intend--"

"We all know exactly what you intended, Doctor," Kirk said evenly. "What

we don't know is how you thought you could get away with it. Would you

care to explain?" "That's right," McCoy grated, frowning as much in

puzzlement as anger. "What the blazes ever gave you the idea that I'd go

along with mutiny?" It was at that moment, as he heard the mixture of

anger and outright incredulity in McCoy's tone, that Crandall realized

how completely he had miscalculated, not just the timing of his move but

everything. The arguments between Kirk and McCoy, the differences of

opinions had meant nothing. In a sense, he had been right in his first,

instinctive assessment of the officers and crew. No matter what their

complaints or fears, they were all bound together in some peculiar form

of extended family, with the captain as patriarch, and there was no way

he could ever gain admittance to it, let alone any degree of control

over it. Reluctantly, but knowing he had no choice anymore, he began to

talk. To his utter surprise, when he finished, he was neither

transferred to a detention cell nor even restricted to his stateroom.

The engineering deck was made off limits, and he was barred from the

bridge until further notice, but other than that his freedom was

unimpaired. McCoy seemed annoyed at the captain's seeming leniency, but

Kirk said only, "Now that he knows how things stand, I don't think he'll

cause any more problems." And then, looking at Crandall,

"You're a practical man, am I right, Dr. Crandal!?" Crandall only

nodded, his relief, even gratitude, mixed with a tightness in his

stomach that he did not realize until later was the beginning of a new

crop of anger.

Six hours later, with the four Destroyer ships showing no sign of

breaking formation or changing direction, Captain Kirk turned sharply

from the view-screen. "Lieutenant Uhura, it's time we tried something.

Tight-beam transmission aimed directly at the three guard ships.

Transmit the same signal, the identification code, that the ships

themselves transmitted during rendezvous. We'll see what happens." What

happened was that the three guard ships immediately closed up their

formation, tightening the shell of protection around the fourth ship.

"Like the Hoshan, Captain," Spock commented, "they apparently change the

password frequently, and an out-of-date password is more suspect than no

password at all." "So, Mr. Spock, do you have any suggestions?" "A

diversion, sir," Sulu said when Spock remained silent, "as was discussed

before. We still have quite a number of unused probes. We could send a

half-dozen of those along one side, and while the guard ships are

disposing of them, we could come in from the other direction." "Simple,

Captain," Spock said, "but possibly effective." And it was. By the time

the probes, traveling at low sublight velocities on theirimpulse

engines, were within sensor range of the guard ships, the Enterprise

had, in effect, circumnavigated the Destroyer ships and was waiting for

them to attack the probes. "Probes within sensor range, Captain," Spock

finally announced. "Guard ships moving to intercept."

"Ready, McPhee?" Kirk asked. "Ready, sir," a faintly accented voice came

from the transporter room. "Security?" "Ready, sir," Lieutenant Tomson's

voice came, also from the transporter room. "Very well Kirk said. "Now's

as good a time as any. Mr. Sulu, prepare to take us to within

transporter range, warp eight. Mr. McPhee, prepare to lock onto at least

one of the life forms on the Destroyer ship as quickly as possible.

Lieutenant Tomson, phasers ready, heavy stun." He paused, glancing

around the bridge. "You all remember the simulations," he said after a

moment. "Let's see what we can do for real. As soon as---" "Guard ships

about to fire on probes, Captain." "Go, Mr. Sulu, now!"

Chapter Twelve

IN THE FOLLOWING moments, Ensign McPhee set a new record for transporter

lock-on. Even so, the first blast from the Destroyer ship caught the

deflector screens before they had a chance to build back up to full

power, and a brief, bone-rattling moment of overload shuddered through

the entire ship. Within seconds, however, Scott had the situation under

control, and the deflectors were fully in place when the second blast

came. By the time the guard ships turned their attention from the

obliterated probes and joined in the attack, the Enterprise was out of

range. Moments later, the central Destroyer ship emitted another

concentrated subspace pulse, and Kirk wondered briefly if it were going

to destroy itself. Instead, the three guard ships closed more tightly

than ever about it, then dropped to sublight and clustered together the

way they had when they had first rendezvoused with the other Destroyer

ship. "Probably trying to decide what happened to whoever it was we

snatched out from under their noses," Kirk said with a faint smile as he

turned toward the image of the transporter room currently on the

auxiliary screen above the science station. "Now let's see what a

Destroyer looks like. Mr. McPhee, bring him in." Lieutenant Tomson and

her two subordinates--the only people in the transporter room except for

Ensign McPhee---triggered their phasers even before the

shimmering materialization was complete. The Destroyer, as tall and thin

as the Hoshan were short and muscular, fell to the deck the moment the

transporter field released him. Taken instantly to an isolation ward in

the medical section, the Destroyer was found to have a suicide device

similar to that of the Hoshan but more automated. Luckily, the primary

triggering mechanism was an external signal, probably generated by a

transmitter in the Destroyer ship. A secondary trigger was located in a

ring worn on one of the Destroyer's long, slender fingers. The device

itself, containing a powerful explosive rather than the laserlike device

in the Hoshan implants, was worn as a collar rather than implanted

within the body. Even so, it took virtually every analytical device the

medical and science departments possessed to remove it without exploding

it. The Destroyer himself, taller than Spock, appeared to have sprung

from avian stock, his hair looking very much like thousands upon

thousands of tiny feathers. His bones, though not hollow like those of

flighted birds, were comparatively light, and the entire impression he

presented was one of delicacy. Even the "uniform" he had worn and which

had been replaced on his body after removal of the collar was light in

both weight and color, pale blue, and loosely fitting with no pockets,

only a single pouchlike container attached at the waist. The Hoshan were

allowed a brief look from behind a transparent barrier before the

Destroyer regained consciousness. Only Tarasek spoke. "Now you will see

what they are like," he said, deliberately turning his back on the

unconscious Destroyer. Unlike the Hoshan, the Destroyer was allowed to

awaken alone in a stateroom with a vision screen as well as a direct

link to the computer's translation circuits. Also unlike the Hoshan, the

Destroyer opened his eyes the moment the monitoring devices indicated he

had regained consciousness. Immediately, he sat up, his eyes taking in

everything in the room in a single, almost owl-like turn of his head.

His heartbeat, according to the monitor, spurted drastically at first

but then dropped back to what appeared to be normal and stayed there.

His fingers, long and slender with narrow, diamond-shaPed nails that

could, generations ago, have been claws, went to his throat, feeling for

the missing collar. And he began to talk, rapid-fire and nonstop, his

voice a startlingly clear, trilling sound, at least as birdlike as his

appearance. "At least he's being more cooperative than the Hoshan," Kirk

remarked. "If what he's doing is really talking," McCoy snapped. "He

could be just chirping to himself, like a big canary." "No, Doctor,"

Spock said, cocking his head sideways, a gesture itself almost birdlike,

as he listened to the computer's voice through his earpiece, "It is

definitely a language, a very complex language And at this rate, the

computer will be able to begin rudimentary translations very shortly."

And it did. Within minutes, the computer began to overlay the

Destroyer's trills with words, at first sporadically, then more

steadily. The first complete sentence was, "If I have offended in any

way, I ask that I be forgiven." "It's time we met face to face," Kirk

said abruptly, moving toward the hall that led to the Destroyer's

stateroom as he spoke. "Lieutenant Tomson, stay in the background, but

have your phaser ready, on light stun. Mr. Spock, is the computer's new

show-and-tell ready to go?" "Ready whenever you give the word, Captain."

The instant the door to the stateroom opened, the Destroyer fell silent.

His eyes, yellow and vertically slitted like a cat's, darted from one to

the other of the four men as they entered. On Spock's tricorder, the

Destroyer's pulse rate shot up sharply, and he emitted a complex series

of trilling sounds. "What are you?" the computer translated, almost

instantaneously, through the universal translator clipped to Kirk's

belt. "Are you to be my punishment?" "We mean you no harm," Kirk said.

"We--" "Are you, then, to be my reward?" Kirk frowned at the translator.

"Spock, are you sure--" A snort of laughter from McCoy cut him off.

"Don't you get it, Jim? He thinks he's dead! He just wants to know if

this is heaven or hell." "Of course I am dead," the Destroyer said, his

trilling sounds growing more shrill, even though the computer's

translation remained neutral. "The ship I was on was attacked and

destroyed." "No," Kirk said, "you aren't dead. And your ship was neither

attacked nor destroyed. Mr. Spock, let's have those pictures." "Sequence

one," Spock said quietly, and the stateroom viewscreen came to instant

life. "Watch," Kirk said. "This is what happened. You are simply aboard

a different ship." "Then you're" Abruptly, the Destroyer's slender

fingers darted once more to his neck, grasping futilely for the missing

collar. "There is nothing to be afraid of," Kirk said. "We mean you no

harm. Just watch the screen. We will show you what happened." For

another several seconds, the Destroyer's fingers fluttered helplessly

about his neck while his eyes went from face to face. On Spock's

tricorder, his heart rate was higher than it had been even during the

initial spurt after awakening. But then, as abruptly as the agitation

had begun, it stopped. The birdlike alien was suddenly still, his

fingers motionless at his neck. As if by an effort of sheer will, the

pulse rate slowed. "I will look," he said, the trills of his words now

lower-pitched, slower. "I will see what you have to show me."

For the next two minutes, then, the computer presented a simulation

similar to a small part of what it had earlier shown the Hoshan, this

one showing the Enterprise as it swooped in close to the Destroyer ship

and snatched their guest from its crew compartment. When it was over,

there was only silence. The Destroyer's yellow eyes looked from the

screen to the four men several times. Finally he spoke. "Then you are

not our enemy? You are not the World Killers?" "We are not," Kirk said.

"Then who?" As simply as possible, omitting all mention of the Hoshan,

Kirk explained what he could. Then, before the alien could ask more, he

nodded to Spock and pointed to the screen, where an image of a Hoshan

ship appeared. "Is this the enemy you speak of?." "Yes!" Another brief

spurt of the alien's pulse rate testified to the truth of the answer.

"These are the ones you call World Killers?" The alien hesitated, as if

trying to bring his emotions back under control. "That is what I have

been told. Are you now telling me differently?" "Why do you call them

World Killers?" Kirk asked, ignoring the alien's question. "Look at any

world in this sector of space, and you will know!" Nodding to Spock,

Kirk once more gestured at the screen. "Worlds such as these?" he asked

as the first of a dozen images appeared. After the first, the alien

closed his eyes, refusing to look at more. "If I am truly still alive,

who are you?" he trilled, the pitch so high it was almost inaudible.

"What do you want?" "It would be nice," McCoy put in, "if all you people

would stop shooting at us on sight. " "Show him, Spock," Kirk said. A

moment later, an image of the stars of the Sagittarius arm of the Milky

Way galaxy appeared on the screen, and Kirk talked the alien through an

abbreviated version of what the Hoshan had been shown. When he finished,

the screen returned to its real-time display of the local star field and

the dots that were the four Destroyer ships. "Now," Kirk said, "tell us

who you are. Tell us how this war with the ones you call World Killers

started." For a long time there was silence. Briefly the alien's fingers

again fluttered to his neck and then dropped to his side. "It started,"

he said finally, "when we were attacked." Slowly and haltingly, then,

the story came out, and it was remarkably similar to the one told by the

Hoshan, except that for these people, who called themselves the Zeator,

it had started nearly four hundred years ago, not one hundred. Like the

Hoshan, they had been peacefully expanding into space, but when they

found the first of the Slaughtered Worlds, as they called them, they

became cautious, adding weapons to what had previously been purely

exploratory ships and taking precautions to keep the coordinates of

their home world safe from discovery. The weapons, however, apparently

proved ineffective, for ships began to disappear. Like the Hoshan, the

Zeator retreated from space long enough to build up their weapons

technology and establish a defense around their home world. After nearly

fifty years, in ships similar to the ones they still used, they began to

move cautiously back into space, toward the Slaughtered Worlds. Once

again, their ships were attacked, but now they were able to fight back.

At one point, they were certain they had located their enemy's home

world and destroyed it, but after nearly a century of uneasy

watchfulness, the attacks had begun again. "Now we have only one hope,"

the Zeator finished, "to find and destroy their true home world before

they can find and destroy ours. In these last few weeks, as I have been

shown the Slaughtered Worlds first-hand, there have been times when I

would have welcomed either conclusion to our centuries of fear. And when

two of our escort vessels were destroyed, I only wished that I could

have taken their place." "Who are you that they were protecting you?"

Once again there was silence, and the Zeator seemed to shrink in

stature. Even the featherlike hair on his head and hands seemed to

flatten against his skin. "I am called Atragon," he said at last, "and I

fear that I am a fool. Until I boarded the ship that you took me from, I

had never been off the surface of our home world. Prior to that, I had

known only what I had seen in our history books. For years I had taught

others from those books, but I did not believe what they said, not

truly, not completely. I had not seen the destruction for myself, any

more than any of the planetbound had seen it, so I did not truly believe

it. The words were just words, not facts, not living people. Naively, I

could not believe that any race of beings intelligent enough to travel

through space could be as savage as those books told us our enemies

were. I could not believe that even if the World Killers had done

everything we were told they had done, they had not had a reason. I even

thought that the war might only be a hoax, something used by the

military to bleed the planetbound of their money and resources.

"Unfortunately, other members of my family had much influence, and I

used that influence to make others see things as I did. I was even

elected to an influential office, and it was then that the

authorities---the military authoritiesdecided that the only way I could

be convinced of the truth was to be shown it first-hand. As I said, I

was a fool, and I gladly accepted their offer, certain I would prove

them wrong. That is why I was on that ship, being shown the Slaughtered

Worlds first-hand. And because I was on that ship, it did not enter the

battle when it should have. To protect me, those ships were lost." "And

the collar you were wearing? The collar filled with explosives?" "Even I

could not be allowed to endanger the home

world. Everyone else on the ships, everyone in the military, has similar

devices surgically implanted, but mine was to have been removed when--if

I returned safely home." "And now? With the collar gone?" "With or

without the collar, I will never be able to return." "We could return

you." "To the ship you took me from? You would deposit me there as you

took me?" "Possibly." "if you were immune to our weapons, perhaps, but

if I have understood your story properly, you are not. And my people

will not be as easily fooled as they were before. And even if you were

to succeed, I doubt that I would long survive." "Why? Certainly your own

people wouldn't kill yOU." "I do not know, but I suspect they would. No

one has ever been taken from a ship in the manner you took me, so no

rules exist for my treatment if I am returned. However, I cannot believe

that I could ever be allowed to return to our home world. Nor would I

wish to, no matter how strongly you profess to be our friends. You have

shown me too much to allow me to trust you." "Too much? I don't

understand." "You have shown me how you are able to track our ships

without your own being detected. You could follow whatever ship I was

on. You could find our home world, and that is unthinkable." "We can

follow your ships whether you are on them or not." "Of course. But none

now will ever return to our home world. Only rarely do ships return

under any circumstances, but now that your ship, obviously superior to

ours, has been observed, none will return, ever. None in this sector of

space dares risk it, and I suspect that none anywhere will risk it, at

least not for many years."

"If we are able to convince you we are not your enemy, you could direct

us to your home world and we could take you there directly. We could

talk to you r leaders." "There is no way I can be sufficiently convinced,

not when the fate of my world hangs on my decision to trust you. But my

decision is of no importance. I could tell you nothing of our home

world's location, no matter what my decision. For I do not know its

location. I am a planetbound, and I was told nothing of such matters."

The alien paused, his narrow shoulders moving in what could have been a

shrug, or perhaps a shudder. "The rest of my life, I fear, must be spent

elsewhere than with my own people. Whoever you are, once you took me

from them, I became as dead to them as if the collar had done what it

was intended to do. As dead as all those on our ships are to our home

world." Which was, Kirk thought grimly, not all that different from what

the Hoshan had said. Communication might be possible with the Zeator,

but they would listen no more than would the Hoshan. Unless something

could be done. "I think," he said, glancing at Spock and McCoy, "it's

time for the Destroyer to meet the World Killers."

Chapter Thirteen

To NO ONE"S surprise, the meeting between the Hoshan and the Zeator

accomplished little. "He lies, of course!" Tarasek said. "Atragon?" Kirk

said, turning to the Zeator on the opposite side of the conference

table. "Do the Hoshan lie as well?" For a long moment there was only

silence. "I do not know," he said finally, his trilling voice dull,

virtually lifeless. "It is possible that he tells the truth. If so, we

deserve the fate we have been given." Of the Hoshan, only Bolduc openly

admitted there might be some truth to Atragon's words. "When for

generations you have known only enemies and when the life of your entire

race is at stake," he said, "you do not take chances. Mistakes will be

made under such conditions." "Shoot first and ask questions later,"

McCoy said, his voice oddly flat. "The only trouble is, when the

shooters are as efficient as you two, there's never anyone left to

answer the questions. Or even to ask them." At McCoy's words, a

thoughtful frown creased Kirk's forehead. "Bones," he said, standing up

abruptly, "thank you. I think your collection of archaic sayings may

have saved the day. At least it's given me an idea how to start."

"I dinna like it, Captain." Chief Engineer Montgomery Scott's eyes had a

look of betrayal in them as he

stood protectively in front of the line of main control panels on the

engineering deck. "I don't blame you, Scotty. I'm not very happy with it

myself, but I don't have any other ideas at the moment." "Could ye no'

just talk to them?" "We'll try, of course, but you've seen how they

react to us--to anyone besides themselves. Even now that we have their

languages in the computer, all we can do is talk at them. And all

they're going to do is shoot at us from the moment they see us." "And ye

want to let them!" "According to Mr. Spock, the deflectors will take

anything either the Hoshan or the Zeator can dish out. If you have any

doubts, Scotty--" "I dinna have doubts, Captain!" Scott said, an

offended note entering his voice as he waved his hand in a gesture that

included not only the control panels behind him but the antimatter

engines and everything else that was under his care. "I ha' no doubts

about these bairns! They can take care of themselves, but to allow--"

"If there were another way, I'd take it, Scotty." Scott fell silent,

pulling in a breath. "Aye, Captain," he said finally, "I know ye would.

We'll be ready." "Thank you, Mr. Scott," Kirk said, his hand briefly and

uncustomarily gripping the chief engineer's shoulder. "I never doubted

it for a second."

For several minutes, Kirk and the entire first-watch bridge crew had

been watching the approaching Hoshan ship. Both the Hoshan and the

Zeator were watching on monitor screens in their guarded staterooms, as

was Dr. Crandall. Only the aliens' rooms, however, were hooked up so

they could talk directly to the bridge and could be channeled, by the

touch of a button, into Lieutenant Uhura's broadcasts. "In effect, Mr.

Sulu," Kirk had said, "we're going to park in the middle of the road.

Just be prepared to take us into the ditch, fast, at the first

indication that

they're intentionally overloading their main antimatter power unit. Or

that any weakness is developing in the deflectors, of course." "Aye-aye,

Captain," Sulu replied, a certain grim satisfaction in his tone and

expression. "Lieutenant Uhura, ready to transmit our recorded message at

them until further orders." "Message loaded and ready, sir." "The

Enterprise will be within the Hoshan vessel's sensor range in

one-point-three minutes, Captain," Spock announced. "Lieutenant Uhura,

start the message." The Hoshan reaction was virtually instantaneous.

Obviously not taking the time to listen to the words of the message, the

ship---the same one the Enterprise had decoyed away from the Zeator

fleet earlier--altered its course fractionally to home in on the

transmission. Seconds later, it transmitted what was apparently today's

computer-generated request for today's recognition code. Almost

simultaneously, a compressed thirty-seven-millisecond subspace burst was

sent out. "As predicted, weapons preparing to fire, Captain," Spock

announced. But none was fired. Nearly a minute went by, and nothing

happened. "Tarasek," Kirk said, "does this mean they are listening to

the message?" "It is possible," the computer said, translating the

Hoshan's words virtually simultaneously. "Speak to them directly,

Tarasek," Kirk said. "Lieutenant Uhura, open Tarasek's channel." "Done,

sir," she said, tapping a single button on the control panel. "I am

Tarasek." The computer translated the broadcast words of the Hoshan. "I

was in command of Defender ship Tromak, which was recently lost in

battle with six Destroyer vessels. I and two of my crew, Radzyk and

Bolduc, have been taken aboard a ship called by its masters the

Enterprise. It is the same

ship that you saw and pursued two days ago. Its owners say they wish to

be friends to the Hoshan, but--" "Hoshan ship accelerating to warp

two-point-three, sir," Chekov broke in. "It is on a collision course

with US!" - "Lieutenant Uhura, give me the channel!" Kirk snapped.

"Aye-aye, sir." With a touch of Uhura's finger, the Hoshan's voice was

cut off. "This is the commander of the Enterprise," Kirk said, speaking

rapidly into the translator. "You have heard our message. We are not

your enemies. You have no reason to fear us or attack us. We will not

fire on your ship. If we wished to harm you, we could have destroyed

your ship when you first attacked us two days ago. We could destroy it

now if we wished. We have been observing you for the past hour and could

have destroyed your ship at any time during that period as well, but we

have not. I repeat, we have no wish to harm you. We only wish to talk

and to transfer Commander Tarasek and the remainder of his crew to your

ship." "Within laser range in thirteen seconds, Captain," Spock said.

"No sign of overloading in antimatter generator as -yet." "To

demonstrate our peaceful intentions--and our patience--we will allow you

to fire at the Enterprise if you wish to do so," Kirk said, speaking

even more quickly. "We will not return the fire." Even as Kirk finished

speaking, the deflector shields flared violently, cutting off the direct

visual image of the approaching Hoshan ship. "Deflectors holding as

predicted, Captain," Spock said, continuing to study the science station

instruments. "Still no sign of intentional antimatter overload." "The

ship is no longer on a collision course, sir!" Chekov said, a note of

triumph in his voice. "It will now miss us by more than fifteen

kilometers." "And how long can they keep that up, Mr. Spock?"

Kirk asked, gesturing at the viewscreen image of the flaring deflector

shields. "Approximately seven minutes at the present level, Captain." At

two minutes, the Hoshan ship shot past the Enterprise, still firing. At

two minutes and forty seconds, it made a second, even closer pass. At

three minutes and ten seconds, it made a third. At three minutes and

thirty seconds, it came to a dead stop little more than three kilometers

distant, still firing. The deflector shields toward the Hoshan ship were

a wall of scintillating radiation, stretching into the ultraviolet and

beyond. "All Hoshan power drive being diverted to lasers, Captain,"

Spock said a moment later. "The additional power will reduce the

effective life of the lasers by approximately forty-five seconds. Still

no sign of anti-matter overload." "Open the channel to the Hoshan ship,

Lieutenant Uhura," Kirk said, and when it was done he repeated what

Spock had said, except for the remark about the antimatter. "When your

lasers cease functioning in another two minutes," he finished, "perhaps

we can start talking. Lieutenant, leave the channel open." The first

laser failed in less than one minute, the final one a minute and a half

after that. Five seconds after the final failure, yet another burst of

compressed sub-space radiation was emitted, this one forty-eight

milliseconds in length. "Antimatter overload sequence beginning,

Captain." "Destroying yourself by exploding your antimatter generators

will not harm us," Kirk said quickly. "We can monitor the process and be

out of danger before the explosion occurs. The ones you call the

Destroyers already tried it with us, and it didn't work for them,

either." "Still increasing, Captain. Twenty-six seconds to terminal

overload."

"Ready for maximum warp, Mr. Sulu, at my command." "Ready, Captain."

"You saw how easily we outran you the first time we met," Kirk said. "We

can do the same again. We can outrun the danger from your exploding

antimatter generators. You will kill only yourselves, no one else!"

"Fourteen seconds, Captain." "Mr. Sulu, max--" "Overload stabilizing,

Captain," Spoc k cut in. "Stay ready, Mr. Sulu. Spock, what's happening?"

"It is similar to what the Zeator ship did, Captain. They have stablized

the overload. However, they have not yet reversed the sequence." "In

effect, they're holding--at what? Ten seconds?" "Twelve, Captain." "And

presumably they could restart the clock whenever they want?" "It is

likely, Captain." "Tarasek? Any thoughts?" "That they stopped at all is

surprising. If it were my ship, I would have allowed it to continue!"

"Of course you would!" the computer translated for Bolduc, in whose

voice Kirk detected what he had come to recognize as sarcasm. The Hoshan

had made several oblique remarks before but had always backed down when

pressed for further information. Nor had he ever before sounded so

vehement, and Kirk couldn't help but wonder if the Hoshan were simply

unable to hold back any longer or if the fact that the words were being

broadcast to another Hoshan ship might have something to do with the

sudden outburst. "I have seen your performance under fire before,

Commander!" Bolduc finished sharply. "That is enough, Bolduc!" Tarasek

snapped. "Is it, now? When the Tromak was struck by the Destroyer ships,

I was knocked unconscious, but not before I saw you try to reach the

override control! If you had been able--" "Silence!"

"Tarasek!" With startling suddenness, a new voice burst from the

speakers on the bridge, and everyone's eyes snapped to the Hoshan ship

on the main viewscreen. "Are Bolduc's words true?" "They are." The

computer translated Radzyk's thin, distinctive voice. "He lies!" "I do

not believe so, Tarasek," the new voice said. "Their words have the ring

of truth about them." "But you yourself have just now overridden the--"

"Present circumstances are quite different, Tarasek! Whether or not I

believe the words of this alien commander who has captured you, I must

believe my eyes and my instruments. I have seen those things of which he

speaks, and I have seen my weapons rendered useless by his ship's

defenses. I think it is time we learned more." Abruptly, there was

silence, and when the voice came again, it was obvious that it was no

longer addressing Tarasek. "I will speak with you, Commander of the

Enterprise. I will not, for now, reverse the overload sequence you say

you are able to monitor, but neither will I continue it. We will speak."

A collective sigh of relief swept the bridge. Even Spock seemed to relax

a tiny fraction. "That is all we ask at the moment, Commander," Kirk

said. "That's all we ask."

For more than an hour, they talked--Hrozak, the commander of the Hoshan

vessel, Bolduc and Rad-zyk, and Kirk and the others on the bridge, even,

briefly, the Zeator--with Kirk slowly allowing himself to feel a

grudging admiration for the alien commander. He could easily see himself

in Hrozak's position had he been born a Hoshan rather than a human a

billion parsecs or a billion years away. Protection of his home world

was everything to Hrozak, as protection of the Federation---of earth-was

to Kirk. But Hrozak paid a dearer price than most Federation Starfleet

captains. Even under so-called normal circumstances, Hrozak's

chances of ever again setting foot on his home world' were slim. With

the Enterprise in the picture, those chances had been essentially

reduced to zero. "We cannot take the chance," Hrozak said, much as the

Zeator had said earlier. "No matter what my personal judgment is, we

cannot take the chance." "And if we had joined you against the Zeator?"

Kirk asked. "The Destroyers, as you call them? If we had put on a show

of attacking them and destroying their ships? Would you have trusted us

enough then?" "Perhaps, in time, but I cannot know what others would

say. We would have only your word that the ships you destroyed were

genuine, not simply dummies constructed to be destroyed for our benefit.

Or even that the ships were truly destroyed. I strongly suspect that our

sensors can be fooled as easily as our eyes by the devices you possess."

"But why would we want to trick you?" Kirk asked for what seemed the

hundredth time. "If I knew that, then I would know everything," Hrozak

said. "As it is, I can only assume the worst, that you have allied

yourself with our enemies-or that you are our enemies, despite the

appearance and apparent abilities of your ship." Kirk sighed faintly,

unable to think of any argument not already made, any demonstration that

he himself would, in Hrozak's place, consider proof positive. "If you

would like" he began, but Spock's voice cut him off. "Antimatter

overload becoming more unstable, Captain." "How much time---" "Unknown,

Captain, but the overload is growing at a much slower rate than before.

The rate, however, is itself uneven." "Commander Kirk," Hrozak's sharply

spoken words were translated, "I have not resumed the sequence!" "I

suspect he has not, Captain," Spock said. "Nonetheless, the overload is

once again growing."

He paused momentarily, his eyes taking in a new reading even as it

appeared. "The rate of increase appears to have stabilized. Barring

further changes, terminal overload will occur in twelve-point-eight

minutes. At the previous rate, it would occur in less than twelve

seconds." "A malfunction, Mr. Spock?" "It would seem so." "Commander

Hrozak, I would suggest--" "It is already being done, Commander Kirk."

"If you can't bring it under control," Kirk offered, "we can take you

aboard the Enterprise before any explosion." For nearly a minute, only

silence came from the Hoshan ship. "Overload stabilizing once again,

Captain," Spock announced. And then, a moment later "Now decreasing.

They appear to have reversed the sequence." "We have," Hrozak said. And

then, after a pause "We would seem to be in your debt, even though we

still cannot allow ourselves to fully trust you or your Destroyer

friend." "We don't ask that you trust us blindly," Kirk said. "We don't

ask for the location of your home world. We only ask that you agree to

take aboard the three Hoshan from the Tromak. And accept the translators

that allow you to communicate, not only with us but with the Zeator.

Speak with your leaders, tell them what we have told you, tell them what

you have seen. Tell them that there is at least a small chance that the

war that you have been carrying on for nearly two hundred years could be

ended with no more bloodshed on either side." "And the Destroyer? The

Zeator, as you call him?" "We will try to get his people to do the same.

And whether or not we are successful, we will do whatever we can to get

you and the Zeator to talking directly with each other." Again there was

only silence from the Hoshan ship. Spock continued to study his

readouts, on the alert for

any sudden change, while Kirk waited, as silently as the Hoshan

commander. When Sulu turned from the helmsman's station as if to speak,

Kirk held up a quieting hand. Finally, after more than a minute, the

Hoshan commander spoke. "The one thing we have not seen is your own

firepower," Hrozak said. "If you are willing, expel one of the probes

you say you carry. Allow us to take it within our own shields and

inspect it with our own sensors. Then, if you are able, you can

demonstrate your firepower by destroying the probe through our shields."

Kirk smiled faintly. "There might be some danger to you. How large a

volume can your shields enclose?" "Not so great as yours, but great

enough. We are willing to take the risk." Kirk turned to Scott, who had

been on the bridge throughout the talks with the Hoshan. "How about it,

Scotty? Can the phasers be set fine enough to take out a probe without

damaging the Hoshan ship?" "Without touching the ship, aye. However, I

canna do anything about the secondary radiation from the phaser impact."

"You heard, Commander Hrozak?" Kirk asked. "I heard. Our ships are built

to withstand such radiation without our shields. We are still willing to

take the risk to make sure that you are not all shell and no teeth."

"Yes," Kirk said, smiling faintly, "that very thought had crossed my own

mind. Very well. Mr. Spock, transport a probe to the vicinity of the

Hoshan ship." "As you wish, Captain," Spock said, turning to the

auxiliary control panel. "Probe launched," he said seconds later. "It is

now five hundred meters from the Hoshan ship." "We might as well make

this as impressive as possible. Mr. Scott, can we perform this operation

from a greater distance? Say from just beyond the effective range of the

Hoshan lasers?" "Their effective range now is zero, Captain."

"I know that, Scotty. Their original effective range." "Aye, Captain, we

can." "Very well. Mr. Sulu, take us back, impulse power. Commander

Hrozak, you heard what was said. Are you still willing to take the

risk?" "I am. And our sensors show nothing in the probe that you had not

said was there. You may proceed whenever you wish." "Beyond laser range,

Captain," Sulu said a minute later. "Excellent. Lock phasers onto the

probe, Mr. Sulu, very carefully. How far is the probe from the Hoshan

ship, Mr. Spock?" "Fifteen hundred meters, Captain. A shield with that

range would be consistent with the Hoshan technology." "Ready, Commander

Hrozak?" "Ready, Commander Kirk." "Very well. Phasers locked on, Mr.

Sulu?" "Phasers locked on, sir." "Minimum-duration burst, Mr. Sulu.

Fire." Instantaneously, a single blue-white beam seared a path from the

Enterprise to the probe, lancing through the Hoshan screens with

virtually no lessening of intensity. Almost as quickly, the beam winked

out, the only evidence of its brief existence a sparking, bubbling wound

across half the face of the probe. "Radiation levels, Mr. Spock?"

"One-eight-seven at the surface of the Hoshan ship, Captain, but less

than one percent of that within the crew compartment. Well within safety

limits." "Commander Hrozak?" Once again there was silence from the

Hoshan ship, but this time for only fifteen seconds. "Very well,

Commander Kirk," Hrozak's translated voice said, "you obviously have

teeth as well as a shell. And no matter how hard I try, I can no longer

see any persuasive reason for someone with your obvious capabilities to

have to resort to the kind of trickery we have been

discussing, or any other kind. Therefore, I will do as you ask. I will

take your translators and your message and my records of what I have

seen to my superiors. I will do what I can, but I can promise nothing."

"Thank you, Commander, that's all we ask. We will transport the crew of

the Tromak and the translators whenever you're ready." Cutting off the

channel to the Hoshan ship, Kirk glanced around the bridge with a grim

smile. "One down, gentlemen," he said, "one to go."

Chapter Fourteen

IN MANY WAYS, the meeting---confrontation--with the Zeator was a replay

of that with the Hoshan. Scotty, forced to watch not just one ship but

four smother the Enterprise in wave after wave of unreturned fire, at

first looked as pained as before, but finally, like Sulu's, his features

took on a grimly prideful look. The commander of one of the guard ships,

however, despite all the logic Kirk could muster and all the pleas that

Atragon could manage, refused to halt his ship's overload sequence. Its

antimatter fuel vaporized the entire ship and disabled the nearby ship

that Atragon had been on. Luckily it left the two more distant ships

untouched. Also luckily for the crew of the disabled ship, Spock, having

analyzed the signals needed to trigger the suicide implants, was able to

override them long enough to allow McPhee, once again in the transporter

room, to lock onto the survivors and pull them from the disabled ship

before its automatic circuits took over and completed the overload

sequence its commander had attempted to halt moments earlier, before the

disabling of his ship had taken that option from him. As a necessary

precaution, the Zeator brought aboard the Enterprise were stunned by

phaser fire as they materialized, but they were kept unconscious only

long enough to take them to the medical section to confirm what Atragon

had said about the implanted devices and to disable the auxiliary

triggering mechanisms in their rings. Atragon, his words relayed

directly to the bridge and from there via subspace radio to the two

remaining Zeator ships, talked almost continually from the moment of the

ship's explosion, explaining what was being done, and why, including an

account of the Hoshan who had succeeded in detonating the Hoshan version

of the implant, vaporizing himself and seriously injuring one of the

humans. The Zeator on the ships said little, only listened, waiting

tensely for the five who had supposedly been snatched from their

exploded sister ship to be allowed to regain consciousness. Like the

Hoshan commander, neither reversed the overload sequence in his ship but

held it steady at barely eight seconds to terminal overload. Kirk also

remained largely silent, letting Atragon do the talking. When the five

from the destroyed ship were allowed to awaken, Atragon was standing in

front of the cushioned examination tables they still lay on,

unrestrained. Kirk, Spock, and McCoy stood behind Atragon, flanked by

the same security team that had stunned the arriving Zeator in the

transporter room. Here, the team's phasers, though immediately

available, were not drawn. Automatically, the fingers of each awakening

Zeator darted to the trigger mechanism in his ring. None, however,

actually attempted to activate it, although their fingers invariably

remained close to the rings, as if ready to make the attempt at a

moment's notice, despite Atragon's assurance that the mechanisms had

been at least temporarily disabled and his repeated explanation of the

reasons. For the most part, they listened to Atragon's tale with an

outward calmness, even passiveness, but when he suggested that the

Hoshan, the so-called World Killers, might not be the ones responsible

for the Slaughtered Worlds, that they might even be innocent victims of

Zeator paranoia, they rebelled. "Who are these creatures that you

believe the fantasies they spin?" the one who appeared to be the

commander asked, casting what was probably a malevolent look at the

humans. "Fantasy?" Atragon demanded. "Was your inability to touch this

ship with your weapons a fantasy? Are these devices that let us speak

with them a fantasy? Is it a fantasy that you are alive, here, when you

should by all rights have been vaporized with your ship?" "I grant that

they have a technology superior to ours," the Zeator said. "That does

not necessarily make them truthful! Who are they? Where are they from?

Why are they here?" "If it will help," Kirk interceded, "we will show

you what we have already shown Atragon." All six were then taken to the

bridge, where, when the five new arrivals became unfrozen enough to

assimilate new information, they were shown roughly the same sequence

Atragon had been shown earlier, a brief summary of the Enterprise's

arrival and its subsequent encounters with the Hoshan and the Zeator.

Atragon, seeing the images for a second time, explained as best he could

to the other Zeator what they were seeing. As with the Hoshan, however,

it was the demonstration with the probe, with the Enterprise's phasers

piercing the Hoshan defensive screens in a split second, that seemed to

impress them the most. In any event, it was then that the five halted

their angry questioning of Atragon on virtually everything he said and

even began suggesting to the commanders of the remaining two Zeator

ships that they had nothing to lose by accepting the translators and at

least speaking to other Zeator of what they had seen and heard. Finally,

reluctantly, the overload sequences were reversed on both ships. A

half-hour later the six Zeator on the Enterprise were transported, three

to each Zeator ship, along with a plentiful supply of translators.

Dr. Jason Crandall, who had been allowed to listen but not to

participate in the meetings with the Hoshan and the Zeator, found

himself wishing with ever-increasing intensity that the Enterprise

possessed the same type of self-destruct mechanisms that the alien ships

did. Such a device, if it existed, would be a ready solution, probably

the only solution, to his problems. Even in his present state of

desperation, he doubted that he could bring himself to commit suicide,

individually and alone, even if he could find a quick and painless

method. For one thing, suicide would mean that he had surrendered, and

it would give Kirk an easy and unqualified victory over him. But if

there were a lever somewhere, the kind of lever that apparently existed

on the alien ships, a lever that would destroy not only himself but the

Enterprise and everyone on board--pulling such a lever would not be

surrender. It would, in fact, be a victory, the only victory that

Crandall could, now, ever know. In the first hours following his

ill-conceived and abortive attempt to overthrow Kirk and his emotionless

first officer, Crandall had felt a brief surge of relief, even

gratitude, at the seeming leniency of Kirk's treatment. Such feelings,

however, had quickly soured as he began to realize that he had little

reason for relief, even less for gratitude. Perhaps not everyone on the

Enterprise knew the precise details of what had happened on the bridge,

but they knew enough. The expressions on the faces of every crew member

he passed in the corridors or on the recreation decks, even in the

turbolifts, told him that much and more. They knew. They knew, and now

they saw him not only as an outsider who could never be allowed to enter

their exclusive club but as an enemy as well. Worse, they now saw him as

a fool. Behind their fleeting, superficial smiles now lurked derisive

laughter. This ludicrous outsider, they thought whenever they saw him,

had deluded himself so thoroughly that he actually thought he could

become one of us. In his ignorance, he thought that he understood us,

thought even that he could come between us.

Even Ensign Davis, the young woman he had once thought of as an ally,

had turned against him, unwilling even to listen to the reasons for his

action. Once he had seen her walking alone down one of the ship's

endless corridors. For a moment, their eyes had met, and he had thought

that, in her, there was at least one person on board who had some

understanding of what he had done. But he had been wrong. The instant he

turned toward her and opened his mouth to speak, her face reddened

angrily, and, deliberately averting her eyes, she turned and virtually

ran to the nearest turbo-lift, as if his very presence were poisoning

the air. Life under such conditions, Crandall had quickly realized, was

intolerable, and every day he became more certain that conditions would

never improve. For a time he had thought there was at least a chance

that some day he might be put down on the Hoshan home world. The Hoshan

might not be totally human, but they would almost certainly be less

alien to him than the crew of the Enterprise. And if only the Enterprise

had entered the battle on the side of the Hoshan, making heroes of

everyone on board, himself included, who knows how far he could have

gone? But now, with Kirk so enamored of his role as godlike bringer of

peace, even that door was closed. Hoshan and Zeator might soon be

talking to each other for the first time in their histories, but neither

would ever fully trust the Enterprise or anyone on it. The Hoshan and

Zeator worlds were both now out of Crandall's reach, probably forever,

and the possibility of finding other civilizations in this no-man's land

of devastation was virtually nonexistent. That had become ever more

apparent with each new stellar sys tem the Enterprise scanned. Worst of

all, however, was the soul-shriveling knowledge that, because of his own

stupidity and miscalculations, earth and the Federation were now as lost

to him as everything else. Even if the so-called gate reappeared

tomorrow and deposited the Enterprise in a standard orbit around

Starbase One, it would' do Crandall no good. No matter how lenient Kirk

played at being here on the Enterprise, Dr. Jason Crandall was, in

Kirk's eyes, a criminal and a traitor, and there was absolutely no doubt

in Crandall's mind that, if they ever did get back to Federation

territory, he would instantly be brought up on charges. Kirk could

afford to do nothing else, not there. Here, far from the reach of the

Council, Kirk was all-powerful, and he could afford to play whatever

cat-and-mouse games he wanted with Crandall. In Federation territory,

where he was only a starship captain, he would have no choice but to

bring charges. Not that Kirk would want to keep Crandall's blunders a

secret, of course. Doubtless he would take great pleasure in telling and

retelling the story of the pitifully deluded outsider who had tried to

instigate a mutiny. Kirk's only reason for keeping it to himself would

be if he thought that by so doing he could gain leverage over Crandall

and his influential friends. He might think that a little blackmail

would get him some extra gold braid or a plum post with Starfleet

Command. Crandall had no doubt that Kirk would be more than willing to

try it--if he thought he could get away with it. But blackmail with the

entire crew of the Enterprise knowing the secret was obviously

impossible. No matter how great their camaraderie, more than four

hundred people, even the crew of a starship, were incapable of keeping a

secret like this one. No, even if by some miracle the Enterprise

suddenly reappeared in Federation territory this very day, Crandall

could see no acceptable future for himself, no future that he would

choose to live through. Lying back on .the bed in his stateroom, from

which he now rarely stirred, Dr. Jason Crandall continued to dream of

levers and destruction.

"Captain Kirk! Ta' the bridge!" Lieutenant Commander Scott's voice

crackled over the recreation deck intercom.

Kirk, sweating profusely from the calisthenics McCoy had insisted he

start up again, dropped the medicine ball that Lieutenant Woida had

almost floored him with and slapped the nearest intercom. "Kirk here,"

he said between breaths. "What is it, Scotty?" "Subspace contact,

Captain, wi' both the Hoshan and the Zeator!" "Where are they?" "Both

beyond our sensor range, Captain, and widely separated from each other.

Both wish to speak wi' the commander of the Enterprise." "On my way!"

Pausing only long enough to grab his uniform tunic, Kirk raced down the

corridor to the elevator, slipping on the tunic as he ran. Less than a

minute later, still breathing heavily, he emerged on the bridge.

"What--" he began, but the words froze as his eyes fell on the forward

viewscreen, split to show two separate images, one in each half. On the

left was a Hoshan, short and stocky in the same type of utilitarian,

multipocketed outfit the others had worn, except that this one seemed

somehow crisper, the pockets more numerous but more for display than for

utility. Perhaps they were, Kirk thought briefly, a badge of rank for

the Hoshan. He could remember no identifying markings on any of the

Hoshan who had been on board the Enterprise. On the right of the screen

was a Zeator, tall and regal, his uniform a pale blue-green with white

and yellow diamond-shaped markings on the breast, where the others had

displayed similarly colored circles. A silvery streak ran down the

center of his featherlike hair. The two images had only two things in

common. First, both Hoshan and Zeator held universal translators, and

second, behind each of the aliens was a featureless bulkhead, revealing

nothing of the interior of the ships. "Their ships have always had a

visual capability,

Captain," Spock said, even as Kirk darted a questioning glance at him,

"but neither the Hoshan nor the Zeator have used it before except in the

compressed subspace bursts." "You are the Commander James Kirk we have

been told of?." the Zeator said. Suppressing a grimace, Kirk ran his

fingers through his perspiration-damp hair and stepped forward. "I am

Captain James Kirk, commanding the U.S.S. Enterprise, yes," he said as

he slid into the command chair that Scott had vacated only moments be

fore. "I am Endrakon," the Zeator said, "in command of all ships

patrolling the Slaughtered Worlds." "And I am Belzhrokaz," the Hoshan

said. "All Hoshan in the Zone of Destruction are my responsibility." "I

am pleased that you both have contacted us," Kirk said. "I am also

pleased that our gifts have enabled you to speak with each other." "Your

devices are most helpful," the Zeator, Endra-kon, said, raising his

translator a fraction. "Had they existed a hundred years ago, many lives

might have been saved." "Many lives can still be saved," Kirk said, "if

you will continue the contact you have begun." "Yes," Endrakon said,

"that is our hope. And that is why we have contacted you, Commander

Kirk. We have need of your great ship." Kirk hesitated a fraction,

darting a glance at Spock and Scott, who volunteered nothing. "As we

told your people when they were on board the Enterprise," he said, "we

will do whatever we can to help. What is it you wish?" "As I am sure you

can understand, Commander Kirk," Belzhrokaz said, "a hundred years of

all-out war cannot be ended in a day, nor can trust be built in a

similar period. Both will take time, and both will require more direct

contact between Hoshan and Zea-tor than can be accomplished through

subspace links

such as these. We must meet, face to face, if peace is ever to come."

"Understood," Kirk said. "Do you wish to meet, then, on neutral ground?

On board the Enterprise?" "Neutral ground, yes," Endrakon said, picking

up where Belzhrokaz had left off as smoothly as if it had been

rehearsed. "It is a concept neither of us has considered in hundreds of

years, but that is what we wish. However, there is more." "Again," Kirk

said, "anything we can do to help, we will." "The rest of what we need

is more onerous, Commander Kirk," the Zeator continued, "and more

dangerous. We need---we both need your great ship to guarantee the

safety of our own ships when we meet." "Could you not simply agree to

disarm your ships?" Kirk asked slowly. "Impossible!" the Zeator said and

was echoed by the Hoshan. "You could keep your ships separated, then,"

Kirk said, "as they are now. The Enterprise could collect

representatives from both ships and--" "No," Belzhrokaz interrupted. "We

must face each other, not only individually on your Enterprise but with

our ships. There is no other way if our efforts are to succeed." "He is

right," Endrakon said. "We must meet. Our forces must meet, peacefully.

We must learn, after centuries of war, to trust each other, but during

those first steps, we both must have your protection." "From each

other?" Kirk asked, frowning. "How can we protect you against each

other?" "We believe your presence alone will be enough," Belzhrokaz

said. "We have both seen what your weapons can do, how they can

penetrate our shields as if they did not exist. If either of us attacks

the other, you must be prepared to destroy whatever ship fires the first

shot." "I wasn't aware," Kirk said slowly, "that either of you trusted

us all that much."

"We do not trust you completely," the Hoshan continued, "but we trust

you more than we trust each other at this point. And we have little

choice. If we are to have even the slightest hope of ending these

centuries of war, we have no choice." "on that," the Zeator said, "we

agree. Our worlds have lived in fear for centuries. We must take this

chance to end that fear. Your presence and your gifts that allow us to

communicate have given us that chance, and we must take it. With your

great ship to ensure a peaceful first meeting, perhaps we will succeed."

Slowly, Kirk looked from the image of the Zeator to that of the Hoshan,

trying to penetrate the barrier of their expressionless faces, as he had

tried with the Hoshan earlier. But this time there was nothing, not even

the tiniest clue in their features to guide him. "Very well," he said

finally, "it will be as you wish." "Thank you, Commander Kirk," Endrakon

said, echoed by Belzhrokaz. "If you will continue your subspace

transmissions, we will both follow them to your ship." A moment later,

the images faded. "Both ships are still transmitting, Captain," Uhura

said, "but only a carrier. Shall I do as they said?" Kirk nodded.

"Continue to transmit," he said, "but do as they do. Only a carrier, no

modulation." "I dinna like it, Captain," Scott said, shaking his head.

"I wouldna put it past either o' them to rig their own ships to blow and

then try to blame it on the other." "The thought had crossed my mind,

Scotty. But we can monitor them for that sort of thing easily enough.

And before they arrive, we'll tell them we can. We'll make it abundantly

clear that we can tell the difference between another suicide and an

attack." Kirk paused, frowning at the blank screens. "I only hope it's

something that simple that they're up to."

Chapter Fifteen

ALWAYS IN THE past, once Dr. Jason Crandall's spirits hit rock bottom,

once he came to fully accept the situation as it existed and began to

make plans based on that newly accepted version of reality, his spirits

would begin to lift. From despair would come the seeds of anticipation.

It had happened in the wake of the Tajarhi disaster, when he had finally

accepted the fact that, even though the accident had not been his fault,

he would be the one to shoulder the blame. Once he had acce pted that

basic fact, no matter how unfair it might have been, and had begun to

plan accordingly, he was on his way back up. He had, of course, had to

leave Tajarhi and start fresh on another world parsecs away, but he had,

eventually, regained much of what he had lost. And it had happened here,

on the Enterprise, when he had realized that, no matter what he did, he

would never return to the Federation. He had once again started fresh,

filled with optimism and enthusiasm. Unfortunately, his subsequent

decisions and actions had been disastrous, largely because that very

optimism had allowed him to see opportunities that did not, in reality,

exist. His total misreading of McCoy's feelings, his willful

obliviousness to the mindless nature and strength of the bonds that held

this insular little group together, and finally his foolish attempt at

mutiny had combined to make his situation even more hopeless than it had

been before. But he had been able, finally, to accept even that.

He had at last admitted to himself that he had no hope' whatsoever of

achieving any kind of tolerable life here on the Enterprise. He had

realized that his only hope for any kind of victory over Kirk and the

four-hundred-odd sycophants that made up this interstellar fraternity

lay in the method of his own death. For several days, however, he had

done nothing about it, laid no plans. This time, because of the utter

finality of his situation, his despair had not immediately begun its

metamorphosis into anticipation, and for days he had simply indulged in

pointless imaginings, fantasizing about what he could do if the

Enterprise had self-destruct systems like the alien vessels. When he

should have been out probing for an Achilles heel, when he should have

been out among the crew, asking questions and talking and observing, no

matter how much he was secretly ridiculed by them, he had been hiding in

his stateroom virtually twenty-four hours a day, pointlessly dreaming of

things that didn't exist. But then, abruptly, when Kirk announced the

return of the Hoshan and the Zeator, everything changed. In an instant,

Crandall was jarred out of his fantasy world, and an instant later he

realized that the Enterprise did indeed, under certain conditions, have

the kind of self-destruct system he had been pointlessly fantasizing

about for days. A self-destruct system that, to his shame, he had

already failed to use. Twice. Literally, he leaped to his feet in sudden

exultation when the realization hit him, and in that instant he vowed

that, no matter what, he would not fail the next time the opportunity

arose. He would finally have his victory.

"Never mind what the blasted machine says, Jim. Do you believe him?"

McCoy, at his desk in the medical section, watched Kirk pace the length

of the room.

"Bones," Kirk said, "there are times when you can evade medical

questions almost as well as Spock can evade emotional ones. I'm the one

who came down here to ask you if I should trust him. Could he have

tricked the machine?" "And that isn't a medical question, Jim. Medically

speaking, Dr. Crandall appears to have recovered from the depression he

went into after he tried to give me the Enterprise and found out I

didn't want it. Also medically speaking, he appears to be healthy as a

horse. As for whether or not he did-or could--get away with a lie while

his hand is stuck in that computerized lie detector you call a Verifier

. . ." McCoy's voice trailed off as his eyes widened in mock innocence.

"Don't tell me you're losing faith in technology, Captain." Kirk shook

his head. "Hardly, Bones. However, after all the malfunctions I've seen,

I don't trust it blindly, either. And out here, who knows how many

millions or billions of parsecs from home, possibly in another universe

altogether, with everyone--but particularly Crandall--in the middle of

his or her own psychological crisis, nothing that depends on purely

physiological reactions to determine truth or falsity can be

one-hundred-percent reliable." McCoy smiled faintly. "You know how I

feel about the infallibility of machines, Jim, even under the best of

circumstances, but it sounds to me as if you've already made up your

mind. Now you're just trying to come up with a 'real' reason." "You may

be right, but I'd still like an evaluation from ship's chief medical

officer." "Without full-scale psychological tests, conducted under

conditions a lot less stressful than the ones we're all living under

now, there's no way of medically removing that last smidgin of doubt. Or

confirming it, either." "All right, then, what do your 'old country

doctor' instincts tell you?" "They don't apply to this sort of thing,

Jim. How would you like it if I asked you what your 'captain's

instincts' told you when Crandall first suggested he might be able to

help in the talks between the Hoshan and the Zeator?" "I'd say that,

logically, his suggestion made perfect sense. After all, he is a

politician. According to the computer, before he let things get out of

hand on Tajarhi, he'd been a middleman in several negotiations. None on

this scale, but big enough. He'd successfully mediated half a dozen

disputes on Tajarhi itself." "That's Spock's logic, not your so-called

instinct. What does it say?" Kirk shook his head with a rueful smile.

"My 'captain's instincts' tell me to be suspicious, even though I

haven't been able to come up with a single reason other than his own

previously erratic behavior. He's obviously not going to try another

mutiny, not now that he understands the situation and knows he can't

succeed. And he couldn't possibly think he could take over the

Enterprise at phaser point and run it by himself. No one, not even

Spock, could run it alone, and Crandall knows that. Logic--and the

computer--tells me that, this time, he's finally come to his senses and

is simply trying to make up for his earlier blunders by trying to be as

helpful as he can." "You're back to logic again. It and your machines

tell you one thing, but your instinct tells you another?" "Exactly,

which is why I wanted your professional evaluation in the first place,

Bones." "And you've gotten it. My professional evaluation is that he's

healthy. Probably healthier than you, if you don't stick to the diet and

the exercise program I laid out for you. Personally and nonmedically

speaking, I wouldn't trust him any farther than you could throw one of

Lieutenant Woida's barbells, and I wouldn't let him anywhere near the

bridge without a full security detail around him, one that's more alert

than the one he got the drop on the first time."

Kirk smiled faintly. "Thank you for your candor, Doctor. I'll take it

and my own prejudices into account. Now what about the rest of the

crew?" he went on, his face sobering. "How are they holding up?" McCoy

settled back in his chair behind the desk. "As well as you could expect,

considering the situation. A few more cases of psychosomatic illnesses

than usual, but nothing spectacular yet. A few nightmares, a few people

who have trouble sleeping. A half-dozen brawls for no reason but the

tension everyone's under. But nothing we can't handle. Or rather,

nothing the crew can't handle themselves, so far." "But later, when--if

it becomes clear that we have no chance of finding our way back to the

Federation, ever?" McCoy shook his head somberly. "I don't know, Jim, I

just don't know. I guess we'll find out if what you said before, about

the Enterprise being a sort of extended family, is really true. And if

it is, if that's enough to make up for the real families and friends and

homes they left behind." Kirk was silent for a long moment. Then,

pulling in a breath, he turned to the door. "It may have to be, Bones,"

he said as the door hissed open. "It may have to be."

When the Hoshan ships first came into sensor range, Crandall, ever under

the watchful eye of Lieutenant Tomson, had been listening attentively to

the subspace exchanges between Kirk and the Hoshan and the Zeator for

more than an hour. Kirk had been explaining, among other things, why

neither the Hoshan nor the Zeator could successfully fake being attacked

by the other. So far, Crandall's only contribution had been a comment to

the effect that he did not think that the Hoshan had believed Kirk's

claim that the Enterprise's sensors could detect the power buildup that

preceded the firing of their lasers. "You have demonstrated you can

monitor their antimatter generators," Crandall had said when the

communication link was broken, "but there was something in Belzhrokaz's

face when he was listening to you that indicated, to me at least, that

he was still skeptical." Kirk had only nodded at the words, since he had

reached essentially the same conclusion independently. The incident,

however, had strengthened Kirk's logical conviction that Crandall was,

in effect, trying to redeem himself and could indeed prove helpful when

the two alien groups came together on the Enterprise. It had done

nothing, however, to eliminate the instinctual distrust he had discussed

with McCoy. "Twenty-seven Hoshan ships, Captain," Spock said, moments

after he had announced the arrival of the first ship within sensor

range. "All appear to be essentially identical to those Hoshan vessels

we encountered earlier." Frowning, Kirk swung the command chair to face

his first officer. "Twenty-seven?" "Twenty-seven, Captain." "Belzhrokaz

didn't say anything about bringing an armada with him." "Nor did he

specifically state otherwise, Captain. Perhaps, like humans, the Hoshan

believe that massive displays of force are the proper prelude to talks

of peace." Kirk scowled at the viewscreen, where the Hoshan ships were

beginning to appear as faint dots. "And how many of their ships did you

say our deflectors could withstand? Eleven?" "For an extended period,

that is correct. F or brief periods, the number is higher." "How much

higher?" "It depends on the definition of brief, Captain. Could you be

more specific?" "Let's say the period of time it would take the

Enterprise to get out of range of their lasers, taking into account the

power that you have to divert from the shields to the warp drive." "The

situation you postulate is even more complex,

Captain. There are too many variables to allow any specific number to be

considered reliable." "Some generalities, then. Anything to give me a

feel for the situation." "Very well, Captain. As I am sure you know, the

more power that is diverted to the warp engines, the more the shields

are weakened and the quicker they will fail. On the other hand,

increased power to the warp engines will take us out of range of the

lasers more quickly, thereby reducing the time the shields are required

to hold. If the situation arises, a calculation of the optimum

distribution of power for the specific circumstances that prevail will

be a necessity. If the twenty-seven Hoshan ships just detected began

simultaneous firing from one hundred kilometers, for example, full power

to the shields would protect the Enterprise for approximately

fifty-eight seconds." Spock paused, leaning over his readouts. "If

accomplished at the first moment of firing, optimum distribution of

power between warp engines and deflectors would reduce that time to

thirty-seven seconds but would take the Enterprise out of range within

fifteen seconds. We would, however, be able to detect any potential

laser firings at least ten seconds prior to the actual firing, which

would give us an additional margin of safety." "You're saying, then,

that if we're on our toes, we don't have anything to worry about from

the Hoshan ships, Mr. Spock?" "I would not express it in those terms,

precisely, Captain, but what you say is essentially true." "And if the

Zeator have just as many ships?" Spock studied his readouts again. "If

similar numbers of both Hoshan and Zeator fired simultaneously from a

similar distance, we would still have sufficient time, but only if we

initiated acceleration toward warp speed within one second of the

attack." "And the upper limit of the number of ships we could escape

from in this way?" "Theoretically, Captain, as long as we do not allow

ourselves to be encircled, there would be no limit. If all power were

diverted from the shields to the warp engines within two seconds of the

moment preparations to fire were detected---eight seconds before actual

firing--we would be out of their effective range before their lasers

could fire." "Then we had better not let ourselves be encircled,

gentlemen. And Mr. Spock, I assume you will have all the necessary

calculations ready for immediate implementation by the helm." "Of

course, Captain." The Zeator, coming within sensor range an hour later,

had thirty-one ships.

When Kirk had finally, reluctantly, allowed Dr. Jason Crandall onto the

bridge, Crandall had been elated, albeit a bit surprised. On his good

days, he had always had a fifty-fifty chance of faking out any lie

detector that relied on physiological reactions, whether it was

computerized or not, but even after he had apparently succeeded with the

so-called Verifier, Kirk had still held back. Obviously, like everyone

on board except perhaps Dr. McCoy, Kirk had a rigid faith in the

capabilities of his ship and its gadgets, but even so, he had delayed

for more than a day before accepting Crandall's offer to help in the

upcoming negotiations, by which time Crandall had almost given up all

hope of ever getting onto the bridge again. And the bridge was where he

would have to be, if he were going to have any chance of winning his

final victory, either now or at some time in the future. For the

immediate future, his primary hope centered on the excessively

suspicious nature that both Hoshan and Zeator had so far displayed.

Neither Belzhrokaz nor Endrakon, he was sure, would blindly accept their

subordinates' claims of the Enterprise's powers, particularly its

seeming invulnerability to their weapons. They would, Crandall suspected

and hoped, ask for another demonstration, and that would be all the

chance he would need.

But then, as the messages flew back and forth through subspace prior to

the aliens' coming within sensor range, his hopes dwindled. To his

surprise, and perhaps to that of Kirk as well, neither of the aliens so

much as mentioned the demonstrations of the Enterprise's capabilities,

let alone asked for new ones. For whatever reason, there seemed to be an

air of resigned acceptance in their attitudes toward the humans. As they

had indicated during the first communications, they trusted the humans

only slightly more than they trusted each other, but neither belzhrokaz

nor Endrakon, unlike the earlier, lower-ranking aliens, seemed inclined

to challenge, or even question, anything Kirk said. Even when it had

seemed, at least to Crandall, that the Zeator commander had doubted

Kirk's claims of what the instruments on the Enterprise were capable of

detecting, Endrakon had said nothing, had asked for no proof. And proof

of that particular claim would have been far easier to supply than the

proofs Kirk had originally supplied in regard to the Enterprise's

deflectors and weaponry. A simple thirty-second demonstration would have

proven it beyond a doubt, but no proof was requested. It was, Crandall

soon began to think, as if both the Hoshan and the Zeator were simply

trying not to rock the boat, and that in itself made Crandall

suspicious, though he was careful not to mention this to Kirk. The two

alien commanders were, he was increasingly convinced, up to something,

and each new development, each new uncertainty, only strengthened that

suspicion and therefore strengthened Crandall's own regenerating

optimism. Finally, then, both fleets of ships came to a stop just inside

transporter range. A pair of Hoshan and Zeator subordinates shared the

viewscreen, maintaining communications with each other and with the

Enterprise while the two commanders left to join their respective

delegations, which would be transported to the Enterprise as soon as

they were ready. "It is understood," Kirk repeated, "that for your

safety and our own, all delegates will be rendered' unconscious briefly

so that we can verify your claim that all personal self-destruct devices

have been deactivated." "Of course, Commander Kirk," the Hoshan

subordinate said, as Belzhrokaz had said earlier, and the Zeator quickly

agreed. "Very well. We have a conference room prepared. As requested, it

is equipped to allow the delegates to be in constant, virtually

instantaneous visual contact with their own ships. Transport can begin

whenever you give us the exact coordinates of your delegations." "Hoshan

coordinates already received, Captain," McPhee's voice came from the

transporter room. And, a moment later "Zeator coordinates also

received. Ready to transport on your order." "Security?" "Ready,

Captain," Lieutenant Tomson acknowledged, also from the transporter

room. "Mr. Spock?" "Ready to neutralize the devices if necessary,

Captain." For a moment, Kirk was silent, his eyes going again to the two

aliens sharing the forward viewscreen. As their commanders had been, the

two were firmly expressionless. "Your delegations are ready?" "They are,

Commander Kirk," both aliens said. "Very well." With a last glance at

Spock and Crandall, Kirk swung the command chair to face the helm. "Mr.

Sulu, prepare to lower deflectors for transport." "Ready, Captain." "Mr.

McPhee,. take the Hoshan first, and don't waste any time." "Of course,

Captain." "Mr. Sulu, lower deflectors. Bring them back to full power the

moment you hear from McPhee." "Aye-aye, Captain." One eye on the aliens

on the screen, Sulu tapped in

the code that lowered the deflectors, leaving his fingers poised above

the keys that would restore them. For a moment there was total silence.

Then McPhee's voice came from the transporter room. "Having trouble

locking on, sir. The coordinates don't--" "Lasers on all ships preparing

to fire, Captain!" Spock said sharply. "Deflectors up, Mr. Sulu!" Kirk

snapped. "Get us out of here!" Even before Kirk had voiced the order,

however, Crandall, his eyes fixed on the controls beneath Sulu's

fingers, was lunging forward, slamming past Kirk, sending the command

chair spinning. An instant later, he crashed against Sulu, knocking him

from his chair before the helmsman had the chance to carry out either

order. At the very moment Sulu was sprawling to the deck, Crandall felt

the numbing sting of a phaser, but before consciousness faded he knew

that it had come too late to help Kirk and his beloved Enterprise.

Chapter Sixteen

To A GREaT EXTENT, it was Spock's Vulcan mental discipline, his ability

to accommodate dozens of sensory inputs simultaneously and to integrate

them into logical patterns, that allowed him to so rapidly interpret the

countless readings his science station instruments supplied. To Spock's

bemusement, Kirk had once compared it to the ability of a great symphony

conductor to instantly absorb the mass of musical notations from the

sheets in front of him, integrate them into the total sound the

orchestra should produce, and then, with his baton, draw the required

combination of sounds from the dozens of players, confident that, if

even a single horn or string hit a wrong note, he would be able to

detect it and pinpoint its source. It was an aspect of this same ability

that now saved the Enterprise from total disaster. Even as he was

announcing that the alien ships were preparing to fire, Spock heard a

sudden intake of breath somewhere behind him, and as the captain began

to issue his curt orders, the science officer heard a sudden motion, a

motion that did not fit the expected patt ern of response to his

announcement. Darting a look over his shoulder, he saw Crandall charging

forward, lunging toward the helm and Mr. Sulu. Without hesitation, Spock

turned and vaulted over the handrail. As his booted feet hit the deck

behind the navigator's station, Crandall was already crashing into

Sulu, knocking the helmsman from his chair. In the same instant, Ensign

Reems, leaping to one side to get a clear shot past Kirk in the spinning

command chair, fired his phaser, hitting Crandall squarely, sending him

sprawling limply onto Sulu, who was struggling to get to his feet and

back to the helm. Spock, taking one long step, leaned over Sulu's empty

chair and stabbed at the buttons that would implement the program to

raise the deflectors and initiate acceleration to warp speed. In that

same instant, the first of the Hoshan lasers fired. A fraction of a

second later, the deflectors only starting to build, the first Zeator

lasers fired. Within two seconds, all lasers in both fleets were firing,

and the Enterprise shook violently as the deflectors absorbed what

energy they could and the engines strove to accelerate out of range.

Within fifteen seconds, they were in warp drive and it was over.

A comprehensive damage report took a bit longer. Safely at the edge of

sensor range, listening on all subspace frequencies but broadcasting on

none, the Enterprise rested, waiting for the verdict. "We're no' quite

defenseless, Captain," Chief Engineer Scott said from the engineering

deck, "but almost. The deflectors were seriously overloaded, trying to

build up while under attack. Repairs are possible, but they'll take a

wee bit o' time." "How much, Scotty?" "Several days, Captain. Each

generator has to be torn down and rebuilt from scratch. But that's not

the worst o' the problems." "What's the worst, then?" "The dilithium

crystals, Captain, the one thing we canna replace or repair. They're on

the ragged edge. We can use them, but only sparingly. If ye need more

than warp four or more than half power from the phaser banks, they'll be

gone."

"Warp four should be enough to keep us out of reach." "Aye, provided

they don't gi' up the ghost altogether." "See that they don't, Scotty."

"Aye, Captain, I'll do what I can." "Dr. McCoy?" "One broken arm,

already being set. Beyond that, some bumps and bruises, but nothing

serious." "Lieutenant Uhura?" "All subspace channels functional, sir."

"And the Hoshan and Zeator?" "No longer broadcasting on any frequency."

"Mr. Spock, what are they doing?" "They have formed a single formation,

Captain. They appear to be trying to follow us at their maximum speed,

warp two-point-five." "Appear to be following?" "They are duplicating

our own departing heading almost precisely." Kirk grimaced. "And this

time, we don't dare let them catch us. Mr. Sulu, lay in a course to our

original point of entry into this sector." "Aye-aye, sir. We're going to

look for the gate again?" "If that's what it was, yes. We don't appear

to be in a position to do much good around here, or to look very far

afield for whoever built it, unless Mr. Scott can do something about the

dilithium crystals. Security?" "Tomson here, Captain. Dr. Crandall is

confined to a detention cell, as ordered." "Any trouble getting him

there?" "He offered no resistance, sir, but some of the crew got a

little ugly when they saw him." "I'm not surprised. Keep a close watch

on him, just to make sure no one tries to do something foolish." "Very

good, sir. I'll see that no one gets to him." "Thank you, Lieutenant.

Now, Mr. Spock, Dr. McCoy, Mr. Scott, as soon as you can spare the time,

I

think we'd better have a few words about our options."

Dr. Leonard McCoy shook his head and scowled, not at any of the other

three around the briefing-room table but at himself. "I'm not saying I

should have predicted what happened," he said, "but I should have

guessed that something like it could have happened." "No more than I,

Bones," Kirk said. "None of us had any way of knowing what was going on

inside his head, not even the computer. From all indications, he was the

last person you would expect to turn suicidal, least of all the way he

did." He shrugged. "Maybe it was all the self-destruction he saw in the

Hoshan and Zeator. Maybe it's contagious in some way." "Maybe for people

like Crandall!" McCoy growled. "Be on the alert anyway, Bones." "Blast

it, Jim--" McCoy began but then subsided. "You're right. I'll have my

staff keep an eye out for symptoms. So far, there's nothing beyond the

tension you could expect, given the circumstances." "Yes, gentlemen,"

Kirk said, looking briefly at each of the three, "the circumstances. Any

thoughts as to why we were attacked?" "Only the obvious one, Captain,"

Spock said. "As you yourself have pointed out, the methods by which many

of the worlds in this sector were destroyed are beyond the technology of

either Hoshan or Zeator. Apparently the significance of this fact was

not lost on them, and their actions, viewed in a narrow perspective,

were only logical." Kirk sighed in agreement. "Once we proved that

neither of them could have destroyed those worlds, they jumped to the

conclusion that, since we had a superior technology, we were the ones

responsible. Yes, Spock, the thought had crossed my mind even before the

attack, but I tried to keep an open mind. Scotty? Bones? You agree?"

"For all the good it does, I do," McCoy said, and Scott nodded.

"Which still leaves the question of who did destroy all those worlds,"

Kirk said. "And whoever it was, are they still around? Are they the same

ones who built the gate? If, that is, the gates were indeed built and

are not, after all, a natural phenomenon. I know we've been over this

ground before, but the condition of the Enterprise and the presence of

the Hoshan and Zeator lynch mob change the picture somewhat. Before, we

were free to conduct a search throughout hundreds of thousands of cubic

parsecs with full power available to the warp engines and the

deflectors. Now, unless we find a source of dilithium, we're severely

limited in both range and safety." "Aye," Scott said, "and I canna

guarantee the crystals will hold up forever, even under limited use."

"But even if they fail," Kirk said, "we would still have warp drive."

"Aye, up to about warp two-point-five, but no' immediately. Until I

could pull the crystals and wire around them, we would have no' but

impulse power." "So, gentlemen, you see the situation. Any thoughts?"

"Obviously," McCoy said, "we see if the gate has come back." "Agreed.

Anything else? I can't be sure, of course, but I'd be willing to bet

that, once our two warring friends can't locate us back there where we

left them, they'll come back to the area where the gate was and keep

watch for us." "Logical," Spock said. "And once they establish a

sufficiently dense perimeter around it, we could not, in our present

condition, penetrate it unharmed." McCoy's scowl deepened. "You're

saying it could be now or never? If we don't find the gate now, we'll

never find it?" "Precisely, Doctor," Spock said. "However, the odds of

finding our way back to known space have never been favorable. Recent

developments have only increased already high odds against us. However,

there is one possibility that has not yet been mentioned." "Yes, Mr.

Spock?" Kirk prompted. "You will recall that, during our initial

explorations in the immediate region of our arrival point, there was one

planet from which anomalous readings were obtained. Deep underground,

our sensors gave readings that, while not indicative of true life, at

least proved that something was there--a sophisticated power source as

well as something that, conceivably, could have been some unknown form

of organic computer." "I remember," Kirk said. "I also remember that you

were as puzzled as I have ever seen you. And that there was no way to

get more information except by beaming down into totally sealed-off

areas through miles of solid rock. With the options we had then, it

wasn't that attractive an alternative. With the more limited options now

before us, are you suggesting it warrants a second look? Including

beaming down?" "Precisely, Captain. The planet does not lie far from the

course we must take to return to our arrival point, so we will lose

little time. In addition, considering the relative proximity of such a

totally inexplicable phenomenon to the equally inexplicable phenomenon

of the gate itself, it is only logical to assume at least the

possibility of a connection." "A control center of some kind?" Kirk

asked. "Customs point for new arrivals? Automated ticket dispenser?" "As

I have said before, Captain, with no more information than we currently

have, anything is possible." "And considering the luck we've had trying

to locate the gate on our own so far," Kirk said with a grimace, "even

the remotest possibility of gaining new information would be worth the

risk." "My thoughts exactly, Captain. I must admit, however, that those

readings have never been far from my mind. Whatever produced them has

been, from the

beginning, a most intriguing and frustrating phenomenon." McCoy shook

his head, a faint smile appearing for the first time since the four had

entered the room. "Spock, you could be being eaten alive, and you'd

spend your last minutes trying to analyze the creature's digestive

juices." "Just because one's life may soon end, Doctor, is no reason to

cease all attempts to learn." Kirk laughed. "He's right, Bones. You

never know what you'll find that might be useful. We'd all be dead ten

times over if--" "Captain." Sulu's voice came over the intercom. "Hoshan

and Zeator ships coming into sensor range from ahead. It looks as if

they've been waiting for us to come back this way." "How many, Mr.

Sulu?" Kirk shot back. "Three so far, sir, one Zeator and two Hoshan."

"Can we slip past them without being detected?" "xrlthout knowing the

precise range of their sensors, there's no way to tell. From the way

they're separated--fourth ship, another Zeator, just came within sensor

range." "You were saying?" "I was saying, they appear to be evenly

spaced. If their sensor fields overlap, there's no way we can get

through undetected." "But even if they detect us, we can still outrun

them." "We can--as long as the crystals hold out." "Assuming they detect

us and follow, how much time would we have in the vicinity of the gate

before they arrive?" "At the maximum warp Mr. Scott says we're capable

of, we would have roughly one standard day." Standing abruptly, Kirk

said, "We're on our way, Mr. Sulu. Scotty, get below and keep your

fingers on the crystals' pulse. Mr. Spock, get back to your station and

locate any gaps that exist in that sensor net. And if

none exists, find the weakest spots and we'll see what we can do." "I

feel obliged to point out, Captain," Spock said as they left the room

and strode toward the turbolift, "that even if we successfully penetrate

the perimeter the Hoshan and Zeator have apparently established, we

could be less successful in finding our way back out." "Point taken, Mr.

Spock. If it comes down to it, however, we are not totally helpless.

Even with the phasers at only half power, we can still punch a hole

through any perimeter they set up." "We canna take them all on at once,

Captain," Scott interrupted. "Understood, Mr. Scott. With any luck, we

won't have to. Just keep those crystals alive as long as you can."

TWenty minutes later, Spock looked up from his instruments. "They know

something passed through their perimeter, Captain," he said, "but at the

range we maintained, their sensors could not distinguish between a

starship coasting with all drives shut down and a small asteroid. Even

so, one ship has broken formation and is approaching us. To avoid them,

we will have to engage warp drive, which, at this distance, they will be

able to detect." Kirk grimaced. "It was a good try. And we'll still have

at least twenty-four hours. Ahead, Mr. Sulu, at maximum attainable warp

factor. And Scotty--" He stopped, the grimace turning to a faint grin.

"You know the drill, Scotty." "Aye, Captain, I do." Scott's voice came

from the engineering deck. "I'll do what I can."

Even before the Enterprise dropped out of warp drive, it was obvious

there had been changes on the planet in their absence. "The antimatter

power source detected earlier is now fully operational, Captain," Spock

announced. "Weapons?"

"None detected as yet, Captain." "Mr. Sulu, put up what deflectors we

have and proceed on impulse power." "Aye-aye, sir." "Lieutenant Uhura,

any subspace activity?" -"None, Captain." "Continue monitoring all

frequencies but maintain radio silence. Mr. Sulu, maximum magnification.

Zero in on the spot directly above the energy source." "Done, sir." On

the screen, the planet looked no different from before, no different

from dozens of the other devastated worlds they had seen. Virtually

airless and drenched in radiation, its surface was fused like something

that had long ago emerged from some cosmic blast furnace. Not a trace of

the original surface was visible through the planetwide scar tissue.

"Sensor activity, Captain," Spock said, leaning closer over his

instruments. "We are being scanned by devices at least as sensitive as

our own." "All stop, Mr. Sulu! Spock, still no indication of weapons?"

"None, Captain." "Could they be shielded? If their technology is

superior to ours, could they have phasers or other weapons, undetectable

behind shields?" "Possible, Captain, but I detect no shielding of any

kind at this time. Nor can I detect any openings in the five kilometers

of rock above the power source. However, the sensors are now picking up

definite life form readings." "Similar to your earlier readings?"

"Negative, Captain. Those readings would not have registered at this

distance. The present ones are quite--normal." "How many? What type?"

"Impossible to tell at this range, Captain." "And the sensors that are

scanning us--whatever is down there is definitely aware of us?"

"Definitely, Captain."

"The gate people, sir?" Chekov wondered, glancing up from the navigation

board. "Or the ones who destroyed these worlds in the first place," Kirk

murmured. "Or both, Captain," Spock said. "Anyone possessing the

technology to build the gates would in all probability also possess the

technology to obliterate those worlds." "Ever the optimist. Very well,

they know we're here, so we might as well see if they want to talk.

Lieutenant Uhura?" "Transmitting on all frequencies, sir. No immediate

response." "Sensor scans strengthening, Captain," Spock said and then

paused, his eyebrows arching minutely. "Their sensors appear to be

affecting our own." "What? In what way?" "Our own readings are becoming

more precise, Captain. It is as if our sensor probes were, in some way I

cannot explain, being enhanced by theirs. Or, perhaps more accurately,

ours may actually be riding on theirs to some extent." "Could it be a

trick? Could they be modifying our sensor probes? Feeding us false

information?" "It is conceivable, Captain, if their level of

sophistication is sufficiently greater than our own. None of the

enhanced readings, however, contradicts any information in the original

readings." "What do they tell us, then?" "Nearly one thousand life forms

are currently indicated, all roughly humanoid. There is still no

evidence of weapons, nor of any shielding that might hide any weapons

with which I am familiar." "But it would at least be possible for them

to hide weapons, not by shielding perhaps, but by falsifying the

information our sensors are supposedly picking up?" "Anything is

possible, Captain," Spock said, not taking his eyes from his readouts.

"And I now detect transporter activity, originating on the planet

ahead."

"What?" Kirk's eyes darted toward his first officer. "We're still far

beyond transporter range, Mr. Spock ." "Far beyond our transporter

range, Captain." "Mr. Sulu, get us out of here!" Kirk snapped, realizing

angrily that he had wasted valuable, perhaps crucial seconds with his

almost automatic response to Spock's announcement. "Aye-aye, sir." But

even as Sulu's fingers danced across the controls, Kirk knew that, this

time, the seconds he might have gained would not have made any

difference. These transporters, whoever was operating them, could not be

escaped so easily. They must have been locked on virtually the instant

Spock had detected them. Already he could feel not only the beginnings

of the all-over tingle that indicated the transporting process itself

had begun but something else, a chilling dampness he had never

experienced before. And in front of him, the forms of Sulu and Chekov

were already beginning to fade. A moment later the entire bridge

vanished into a swirling haze.

Chapter Seventeen

THE COMMAND CHAIR no longer beneath him, Kirk tumbled to an

all-too-solid, plastic-smooth floor, only inches away from Sulu and a

pair of crewmen he didn't recognize. Catching himself, he leaped to his

feet, grasping for his communicator even as images of the huge,

cavernous room that now surrounded him registered in his mind. But the

communicator was gone, as was the universal translator which, since the

first encounter with the Hoshan, he had kept clipped to his belt as

well. In front of him, Sulu and the two crew members were scrambling to

their feet, but even as they did, more began to materialize, but not in

the silvery snowfall that was the trademark of Federation transporters.

Instead, they appeared first as a hazy swirl of smoke, not unlike a

condensed or focused version of the billowing mists that had marked the

appearances and disappearances of Gary Seven, and for a moment the

thought darted through Kirk's mind that perhaps the still unknown race

that had trained Seven and sent him on his benevolent mission to

twentieth-century earth might be involved here, not only with whomever

or whatever was doing the transporting but with the gate that had

brought them here in the first place. But that possibility, he realized

an instant later, was only speculation, something to blunt the shock of

what he was seeing. A dozen feet away, Spock was slowly solidifying, and

beyond him, Lieutenant Uhura, and to the left, Scott and Chekov. And in

all the space between, dozens more of the crew were appearing, many

lurching and crashing into one another as they tried to keep their

balance. Just to Kirk's left, an ensign from security appeared, his

empty hand extended in front of him as if holding a phaser, and in the

distance, before his view was obscured by dozens more of the

materializations, he spotted Lieutenant Tomson. Virtually the entire

crew was being snatched from the Enterprise, leaving it a derelict! Or,

worse, under the control of whomever was operating these transporters.

Automatically, Kirk took in his new surroundings, hoping against hope

there would be something he could use, something that would give him

even a hint about who was doing this and what he could do to counteract

it. Overhead, in the center of the otherwise featureless, arched ceiling

nearly a hundred feet high, was a circular, faintly glowing formation

that might have been part of the transporter equipment. Other than that

glow, he couldn't locate the source of the relatively dim light that

filled the entire room. Everything was visible, but, as if it were an

overcast day on a planet's surface, there was no single source of light

and not a single shadow anywhere. "Spock!" Kirk called loudly while most

of the massive room was still gripped by stunned silence. "McCoy! Uhura!

Chekov! Scott! Tomson! Over here!" There was, he noted automatically,

vir tually no echo or reverberation, despite the hugeness of the room and

the high, arched ceiling. Everywhere in the room, faces turned toward

Kirk's voice, but for the moment, except for those whose names he had

called, there was only dazed silence in response. Spock and the others

threaded their way through the disoriented crowd toward him,

Spock slowing once to more closely observe another crew member--Ensign

McPhee, it turned out-as he materialized less than a yard in front of

him. "Do any of you have a communicator?" Kirk asked when they had all

gathered around him. "A phaser? A translator? Tricorder? Any equipment

at all?" Hands darted to belts but came away empty. Apprehensive or

angry frowns creased all brows but Spock's, whose arched eyebrow was as

eloquent as any of the other words or expressions. "We seem to be on the

receiving end this time, gentlemen," Kirk said when it became obvious

that none of them had retained a single piece of equipment through the

transport operation. "Whoever brought us here has separated us very

neatly not only from the Enterprise but from anything we could use to

defend ourselves, analyze our surroundings, or communicate with anything

or anyone other than ourselves." "Apparently, Captain," Spock said,

looking slowly around. By now, the materializations seemed to have

stopped, and the faint glow had disappeared from the massive

transporterlike formation in the ceiling. The crew members--the entire

four-hundred-plus ships' complement, from the look of it--were beginning

to regain their voices. "The question is," Spock went on, raising his

voice to be heard above the growing din of hundreds of other incredulous

and puzzled voices, "where are the ones who brought us here? Who are

they, and what do they want? And of even more immediate concern, are

they now controlling the Enterprise, and if so, are they aware that its

damaged deflectors make it virtually defenseless or that portions of the

Hoshan and the Zeator fleets will in all likelihood arrive within less

than one standard day?" "Brilliant, Spock," McCoy grated. "I don't

suppose you've got any answers to go along with the questions." "Not at

this point, Doctor, but if you will be patient-"

From somewhere in the mass of milling people, an angry, incoherent shout

cut Spock off in midsentence. Kirk, frowning as he turned toward the

sound, heard a second shout, and then a scream. Suddenly, there was

silence everywhere except for the-continued shouting--the cursing, Kirk

now real-ized-from the one area. Wordlessly, he strode toward the

distant voices, Spock and the others following, the crowd largely

evaporating from his path as they recognized him. As he neared the site

of the disturbance, he caught the word "Crandall," sounding very much

like an epithet itself, and he increased his pace. Crandall must have

been picked off the Enterprise along with the regular crew members, and

now, deprived of the protection of his detention cell, he was obviously

fair game for those who, rightly or wrongly, blamed him for their

present predicament. Within seconds, Kirk and Lieutenant Tomson were

forcing their way through a tightly packed ring of more than a dozen

angry men. "Break it up, gentlemen!" Kirk snapped, and at the sound of

his voice there was sudden silence. Inside the ring, two ensigns had a

flushed and battered Crandall between them. One was gripping Crandall's

green tunic front and lifting him until he stood on tiptoes. "This

yellow son of aw" the other began, his voice stiff with fury, his balled

fist drawn back to strike again, but Kirk cut him off sharply. "That's

enough, mister! Both of you, let him go! Now!" "But Captain--" "I said

now!" With obvious reluctance, the one lowered his fist and the other

untwined his fingers from the crushed fabric of Crandall's tunic front.

"We will deal with Dr. Crandall once we are safely out of here," Kirk

went on, "and not before. For the moment, he is in the same boat as the

rest of us, and I won't have any more of this undisciplined behavior!

All our efforts--repeat, all our efforts and concentration must be

focused on understanding the situation we're in. Otherwise, we may never

have a chance to get safely out of here and back to the Enterprise. Is

that understood, gentlemen?" "But he's the one who got us into this mess

in the first place! What if he----" "Dr. Crandall has acted foolishly,

perhaps maliciously, and he's caused us problems, including damage to

the ship. He is not, however, solely responsible for our being here,

perhaps not even partially responsible. We will keep an eye on him from

now on. You-- all of you!" he said, raising his voice to a shout that

carried throughout the huge room. "All of you will observe and listen

and, above all, think! Is that clear?" For a long moment there was total

silence, but then, first from the two men directly in front of him and

finally, like a rush of murmuring echoes, from everywhere in the room

"Yes, Captain, we understand." Grasping Crandall's arm, Kirk marched him

out of the now dissolving knot of spectators, bringing him to a halt in

the middle of the group of officers a dozen yards away. "As for you, Dr.

Crandall--" "Why didn't you let them finish me?" Crandall asked, an odd

tone of defiance in his voice, anger in his bruised features. "It would

have saved you a lot of trouble. " "You may be right, Dr. Crandal!,"

Kirk said coldly, "and if you try to pull anything else, I will let them

finish you. In any way they see fit. Understood?" For a moment, the

defiance from Crandall's voice seemed to glitter from his eyes, but then

he slumped and averted his gaze. "I understand, Captain," he said, his

voice as subdued as his new posture. "I hope you do, Crandall, I

sincerely hope you do," Kirk said. "Lieutenant Tomson, don't let him out

of your sight." "Captain!" A single voice, high-pitched and excited,

pierced the newly rising hum of voices that was beginning to fill the

room. "Our phasers and communicators---everything's over here!" The one

who had called a young ensign, her assignment on the Enterprise her

first post out of the Academy, Kirk remembered as he saw her--was

waiting eagerly at the edge of the huge circle of Enterprise personnel.

Beyond her--beyond an edge defined by the transporterlike circle in the

ceiling--the cavernous room extended another fifty even more dimly lit

feet. "Ensign Davis, isn't it?" he said automatically. "Yes, sir," she

said, freezing under his gaze, momentarily positive that, somehow, by

just looking at her, he would become aware of her earlier disloyalty,

her foolishness in believing, even for a few days, the insidious hints

and half truths that Crandall had tricked her with. "There," she said,

breaking the grip of the guilty delusion as she turned abruptly and

pointed into the dimly lit emptiness. "They're out there, but I can't

get at them! There's some kind of barrier!" "Good work, Ensign," he said

as he looked in the direction she was pointing and saw, in a recessed

area of one wall, where the light was the dimmest of all, hundreds of

pieces of equipment---communicators, phasers, tricorders, medikits,

planetary survival equipment, universal translators, virtually every

portable item from the Enterprise and some never meant to be portable.

They appeared to be suspended in midair in the recessed area, as if

lying on invisible shelves. Frowning, Kirk took a cautious step toward

the equipment. Immediately, he felt the barrier. Obviously a force field

of some kind, it felt not like a wall but, at first, like a gentle wind

in his face. "Keep back," he said, motioning the others away. "Spock, be

ready to pull me out of this thing, if it looks like I'm in trouble.

I'll keep up a running account as I go."

"As you wish, Captain," Spock said, experimentally extending one arm to

reach past Kirk, deeply into the field, then withdrawing it.

"Jim!" McCoy protested, but fell silent as he saw the determined look on

Kirk's face. "All right," he said after a second, "but just remember,

all my medical equipment is back on the Enterprise. Except for the

tricorders and medikits, which appear to be on the other side of this

invisible wall."

Nodding his acknowledgment, Kirk moved another short step forward and

began talking.

The wind, no longer a gentle breeze, mounted with each inch, until it

was no longer a wind but a steadily increasing pressure, mounting until

it felt like a smooth, nonviolent version of the pressure air exerts

against a hand that's extended out through the window of a moving

vehicle. The pressure was not against any single point or group of

points, but uniformly against every square centimeter of the front of

his body. Getting enough breath to describe the sensations became harder

with each inch he moved forward.

Abruptly, he stopped trying to move, and in the instant that he did, the

pressure vanished. "It's gone," he said. "The pressure, whatever it is,

went away as soon as I stopped pushing against it."

"Fascinating," Spock said. "Obviously it does not work on the same

principle as our tractor or repulsor beams."

Slowly, Kirk lifted his arms, but when he tried to reach forward with

one hand, the pressure returned abruptly and fully, not just against his

hand and arm but his entire body. With each inch his hand was extended,

the greater the pressure became; and as the pressure increased, he began

to have even more difficulty breathing, as if it really were a perfectly

steady but extremely strong wind blowing in his face, taking his breath

away.

"Fascinating," Spock repeated. "And, Captain, notice that your sleeve is

apparently not affected, nor is the material of the rest of your

uniform. The force would appear to act directly on one's body but not on

one's clothing."

Spock was right, Kirk realized instantly. Otherwise the sleeve of th e

extended arm would have been forced halfway back up his arm. Lowering

his arm but continuing to lean into the pressure, he looked down at his

uniform and saw that the folds in the material, the trouser legs that

flared out over his boot tops were likewise untouched by the pressure.

For a long moment, he stood still, relieving the pressure and catching

his breath. Finally, he sat down and removed one boot and, pushing

against the sole, slowly slid it top first along the floor into the

barrier. As before, the pressure built up against his hand and body, but

not against the boot, the top of which extended a good thirty

centimeters beyond the farthest point he could force his hand.

Retrieving his boot, he started to slip it on. "Any thoughts, Spock?

Anyone?"

"If I had a good old Georgia fly rod," McCoy said, "I might be able to

snag some of that stuff. Unless there's a field around it that blocks

out inanimate objects."

"They're obviously supported by a force field of some sort," Spock said,

"or perhaps embedded in it."

"Yes, but--" Kirk, still seated on the hard, plastic-like floor,

frowned, stopping in the middle of pulling his boot back on. For a

moment, he ran his fingers over the insulating inner lining.

"Something happened to this boot while it was in the barrier," he said.

"Or on the other side."

The others leaned closer as he removed the boot again. The inner

surface, instead of being smooth and seamless, was rough, as if it had

been scraped by some harsh abrasive. It was still soft, like the dark

foam rubber it resembled, but the surface texture was totally changed.

"Let me see your hand, Jim," McCoy said quickly. "If it was something in

the barrier--" Still frowning, Kirk withdrew his hand from the boot and

looked at it with McCoy. It was, as far as either could tell, unchanged.

Meanwhile, Spock had leaned down and picked up the boot and was

examining it. After a second, one eyebrow arched slightly and he glanced

briefly through the barrier. "A vacuum, Captain," he said. "There would

appear to be a vacuum on the other side of the barrier or, at the very

least, extremely low air pressure." "How can you know that?" McCoy asked

skeptically. "It's quite simple, Doctor. As you know, the insulation in

our boots contains, as does most insulation, thousands of minute bubbles

of inert gas. Many of those bubbles appear to have burst, as they would

do if exposed to a vacuum. The rupturing of those bubbles is the cause

of the surface roughness." Kirk took the boot back and examined the

inner surface again. "At least," he said after a second, "it's still

wearable. However," he went on, resuming the task of replacing the boot,

"escaping through the barrier would not appear to be a viable option."

"I fear not, Captain. Nonetheless, I would suggest a close inspection of

the entire perimeter. We do not yet know what conditions prevail in

other areas, nor even that openings do not exist." Standing, Kirk

nodded. "Quite right, Mr. Spock. Scotty, Chekov, Sulu, you go that way.

Spock and Uhura and I will go the other and meet you on the far side.

Lieutenant Tomson, you bring Crandall and come---" Abruptly, Kirk's

words were cut off as he felt the clammy tingle of a transporter beam

gripping him. "Spock!" he snapped. "It's happening again! If I don't

return--" Again his words were chopped off, this time by the momentary

paralysis that precedes the actual transporting process. And then, with

the same quickness he had noted before, the room and everyone around him

faded into nothingness, and he waited tensely to see what would replace

them.

Chapter Eighteen

ONCE AGAIN, KIRK had little time to wait. Within fractions of a second,

his new surroundings leaped into view. For just an instant, the thought

flashed through his mind that he had been somehow returned to the

Enterprise's transporter room, so similar was the dimly lit area he

found himself in, but the illusion quickly faded as he saw the

dark-skinned, bearded man who stood at the transporter controls, his

shadowy eyes fixed on a metallic, switch-laden box that looked

remarkably jury-rigged. It was, however, perched on the edge of a

control panel whose levers and buttons vaguely resembled the

Enterprise's transporter controls. The platform on which Kirk stood was

also different, higher than the one on the Enterprise and equipped with

only three transport units, not six. And, like the giant circle in the

ceiling of the room he had just been snatched from, a faint red glow

hovered around the upper, overhead section of each unit. Cautiously, he

tried to move and found that, for all intents and purposes, he was

rooted to the spot. It was as if, he thought helplessly, he had been

dumped into the middle of one of the barriers, one that kept him not

only from moving forward but from moving more than two or three inches

in any direction. He could breathe easily enough, and move his limbs and

his head, but that was all. Returning his attention to the operator,

Kirk saw trousers. If it was a uniform, there was no visible' insignia

of rank. His fingers cautiously worked a half-dozen of the switches on

the jury-rigged box and then worked the other controls. A moment later,

one of the other two transport units glowed more brightly, and the air

above it filled with a tightly contained volume of swirling fog that

quickly metamorphosed into the shape of a woman, dark-skinned and

short-haired like the operator, and dressed in the same featureless

tunic and trousers. In her hands, she carried a small device that in

general appearance reminded Kirk of a tricorder, except that it, too,

had a jury-rigged look about it. Unrestrained by whatever held Kirk, she

stepped off and went to stand at the edge of the transporter platform.

As she motioned with one hand, a panel slid up in one of the walls,

revealing a window or viewscreen of some kind. Watching the screen, she

tapped a series of instructions into the tricorderlike device she held.

As she did, an image appeared on the screen--an image of herself. A

moment later, she spoke. Her voice was deep but somehow melodic, and the

sound she made sounded to Kirk's ear like "Aragos." At the same time,

what could have been a graphic representation of the sound appeared on

the screen below her image, and a series of previously unseen,

multicolored lights next to the screen flickered briefly. Another series

of instructions was tapped into the tricorderlike device, and her image

vanished, only to be replaced by one of Kirk himself. Instead of

speaking again, the woman turned to look at Kirk directly, with an

expression that very well could have been eager expectancy, Had she been

introducing herself?. he wondered with a frown. "James Kirk," he said,

watching the screen's graphics form and fade and the lights next to the

screen flicker. "I am captain of--" he started to continue, but a

sharply upraised hand silenced him.

Hastily, she tapped something else into the device, accompanied by more

graphics and flickering lights, and he couldn't help but wonder if she

were somehow erasing what he had said. Then another image appeared, this

time of the device she was holding, and again she spoke and again the

graphics appeared and the lights flickered. When they faded, she nodded

to the operator, and a moment later the air above the third of the

transport units clouded and then cleared, revealing one of the

Enterprise's medical tricorders suspended in midair. Simultaneously, its

image appeared on the screen, and the woman looked expectantly toward

Kirk once again. And finally it dawned on him. A language lesson! Hope

flooded through him. His captors, whoever they were, wanted to talk, not

kill! In the same way he had wanted to communicate with the Hoshan and

Zeator brought aboard the Enterprise, these people wanted to communicate

with him! And that screen with its graphics and flickering lights must

be a crude form of translator. Obviously, it did not have the ability,

as did the universal translators, to read and map the corresponding

neuronic activity of the speakers' minds, so the process would be long

and tedious. Far too long to save the Enterprise from the combined

Hoshan and Zeator fleet that was at this moment probably less than

twenty standard hours distant. If only he could get his hands on a

translator! On the screen, the image was flashing, as if to get his

attention, and the woman was looking at him, obviously urging him to

speak. "Medical tricorder," he said, stimulating another set of graphics

and flickering lights. Ironically, the next item that appeared in the

air above the transporter and on the screen was a translator, but, other

than naming it, there was nothing Kirk could do.

An hour after he had been snatched away, Captain Kirk reappeared in the

cavernous room, at almost the precise point from which he had originally

been taken. Alerted by the billowing precursors of the transport beam,

Spock and McCoy and a half-dozen others were hurrying toward him the

instant he was completely materialized. "They want to talk," Kirk

snapped out while they were still approaching him. "They have a crude

computer translator, and they appear to be simply trying to learn the

language." Before he could say more, Dr. McCoy and Lieutenant Commander

Scott vanished in twin pillars of swirling transporter smoke. "Captain,"

Spock said, barely missing a beat as his two companions disappeared,

"you saw our captors?" "I saw them," he said and went on to briefly

describe the scene he had been snatched into. "Either they call

themselves Aragos, or that's the name of the one who was trying to

communicate with me." "Aragos, Captain?" Spock said. "I am sure I have

heard that word before." "I know," Kirk said. "It sounds familiar to me,

too, now that I have the time to think about it." He grimaced. "If we

coul d just get in touch with the computer, or get our hands on a

translator! Spock, no one's come up with a substitute for Bones's fly

rod idea?" "Negative, Captain. We have literally nothing but the

clothing we wear. However, it was observed during your absence that

several of the objects from the Enterprise were apparently transported

somewhere and returned, one at a time." Kirk nodded. "I'm not surprised.

They were using them as part of the language lesson. In fact, that might

be the main reason they brought them all down here. They transported

them to the room I was in, showed them to me, and had me name them They

ran through

one of everything, I think, and then started showing me pictures of the

Enterprise's controls." Turning to look out through the barrier, he saw

one of the objects from the Enterprise turn momentarily to smoke and

then vanish as he watched. "They seem to be running Bones and Scotty

through the same routine," he said with a frown. "Apparently they didn't

believe what I told them." "Perhaps it is just as well, Captain." "You

sound as if you have an idea, Mr. Spock." "I do, but it cannot be

implemented unless they repeat their procedures again with me. If they

do, I can attempt to influence them mentally." "A mind touch? Without

physical contact?" "I can guarantee nothing, Captain. If I am given the

chance, I can only try. If, as you say, they are anxious to communicate

with us, they may be more receptive than they would be under other

circumstances." "Let's hope so. If we don't establish some kind of

communication before the Hoshan and the Zeator get here, it probably

means the end of the Enterprise. And the end of any chance to return to

the Federation." He broke off, shaking his head. "Even if these people

have the technology to defend it, I don't think they're in control

enough to use it effectively," he said and went on to describe the

seemingly jury-rigged auxiliary controls for the transporter and the

tricorderlike device the woman had used. "Whoever they are," he

finished, "I don't think they're the ones who built this place

originally. Their ancestors, perhaps, but not them." For nearly an hour,

then, the two of them talked, with Uhura, Sulu, and Chekov alternately

listening and volunteering comments. Kirk described the transporter room

and its controls in as much detail as he could remember, and even as he

did, the items beyond the barrier continued to appear and disappear.

Finally, as they were discussing the earlier, lower-level life form

readings the Enterprise had detected, Spock suggested they might have

been generated not by

organic computers but by the same humanoids the later sensor readings

detected. "Suspended animation?" Kirk asked. "You're saying these people

may have built this place as a sort of ultimate bomb shelter? A place to

survive until whatever destroyed their world went away and it was safe

to come out again?" "Possible, Captain, even though the readings were

not entirely consistent with suspended animation. Both the Hoshan and

the Zeator told us they themselves constructed massive defenses for

their own worlds, which apparently are outside this zone where all

worlds have been destroyed. Here, directly in the path of whatever was

destroying the worlds, this subsurface vault and the possibility of

outliving their enemies may well have been their only hope for

survival." "But why would they awaken now, just in time to snatch us off

the Enterprise?" "Pure chance, perhaps. Or our earlier approach could

have triggered some revival mechanism. There was, you will remember, an

operating power source. I detected no sensor probes at the time, but

that does not mean none was present. Or our own sensor probes might have

been the triggering mechanism, reviving the people in order that they

could defend themselves." "Or find out if the war was over. Unlike

everyone else we've run into here, this bunch at least wants to talk,

so--" Kirk broke off sharply as, a few feet away, the smoky forms of

Scott and McCoy began to materialize. Hurrying toward them, Kirk

wondered who, if anyone, would be next. "Bones! Scotty!" he said

quickly. "A transporter room? Language lesson?" "Aye," Scott said, "I

think so." But before he could say more or McCoy could do more than nod,

Spock broke in.

"I am next, I believe, Captain," he said, and as Kirk turned sharply

toward him, the swirling smoke of the alien transport system began to

form. "Spock!" Kirk shouted, as if raising his voice could penetrate the

clouds and reach the Vulcan's now transparent ears. "Get that

translator!" Maybe, he thought, we have a chance after all, and he

wondered if they were being watched, if even the fact that it was Spock

he had conferred with after his return was what had prompted the aliens

to take the Vulcan next. "Captain!" Lieutenant Tomson's shout jerked

Kirk's attention away from the fading column of smoke that had been

Spock. Turning abruptly, Kirk saw why she had yelled. Someone else was

disappearing in a swirl of smoke, the last someone Kirk had hoped would

be taken. If anyone could throw a monkey wrench into Spock's attempt to

communicate with the aliens, it was Dr. Jason Crandall.

Chapter Nineteen

SPOCK"S VULCAN EYES, more accustomed to sudden or extreme variations in

light than most humans, took in the dimly lit transporter room at a

glance and then centered his gaze on the controls. The auxiliary

controls, as the captain had said, looked jury-rigged, but to Spock's

analytical eyes, the setup was more indicative of ingenuity than

imperfection or any lack of understanding or skill. In some ways it

reminded him of devices he and Chief Engineer Scott had improvised to

work around failed equipment on the Enterprise or to make a piece of

equipment perform an emergency service that its original designers had

never intended it to do. As he studied the controls, still relegating

the humanoid forms in the room to the background of his thoughts, one of

the other transport units was activated. Looking around, he saw that Dr.

Crandall was materializing, and for a moment he wondered what logical

reason the aliens could have had to select Crandall. If they had been

observing the Enterprise crew where they were being held, they could

well have determined, as had the first Hoshan brought aboard the

Enterprise, that Captain Kirk was the leader and was therefore the first

individual with whom to attempt contact. Knowledge of the language was

obviously not required for such deductions to be made. Similarly,

because McCoy and Scott and Spock himself were among those the captain

had first gathered around

him, the aliens could have selected from that group for their subsequent

attempts at contact. However, he quickly realized, they would also have

seen Crandall being rescued by Kirk, and that alone could have caused

them to assume he was an individual of importance. Satisfied with the

logic of the situation, Spock turned his attention to the two

dark-skinned human-oids. They were as the captain had described a

female and a bearded male, both dressed in simple, dark outfits with no

indication of rank or authority. As his eyes took in their shadowy

features, however, he detected something else, something in the way they

stood, tensely waiting. But it was more than that, he realized a moment

later. Already, even before attempting any form of mental contact, he

could detect something beyond the physical tension. Behind it, he could

feel the mental tension and a trace of the fear that generated it. These

humanoids as the captain had hoped, were not enemies. They were not the

ones who had destroyed these worlds tens of thousands of years ago. In

emptying the Enterprise, they had not acted out of hostility. Nor had

they acted solely out of fear of the Enterprise, although fear--fear not

only of the Enterprise but of something ill defined and deliberately

forced out of their conscious minds--had undoubtedly been a part of

their motivation. As it still was. From Crandall, now fully materialized

and looking about with frantic eyes, Spock felt nothing, but that was

not surprising. During Crandall's time on the Enterprise, Spock had

observed that Crandall, even more so than most humans, had the ability

to conceal his true emotions and generate the illusion of other, totally

false ones. Unlike Vulcans, whose emotions were rigorously controlled by

logic, Crandall and others of his type were able only to repress and

disguise their emotions. Behind the ever-changing and deceptive facades

that they maintained, they were in truth

controlled by their constant and illogical inner turmoil. Where Vulcans

were masters of their emotions, Crandall was a slave to his, no matter

how it could sometimes appear to other humans. As Spock considered what

effect Crandall's presence might have on his efforts to obtain a

translator, the first image appeared on the screen in the far wall. As

it had been for the captain, it was an image of the woman who stood next

to the transporter platform, controlling the screen through the device

she held. "Aragos," Spock said before she could speak, and as he spoke

the name, the same frustrating sense of familiarity that had troubled

him before flickered through his thoughts. Turning his eyes on the

bearded male at the transporter controls, he repeated the word, this

time with a questioning intonation, though he doubted that the tone

would have any meaning to them. The woman's features, however, did

undergo a change, and she hastily keyed something into the device she

held. A moment later, the man's image appeared on the screen, and the

woman repeated the word slowly. Next, the captain's image appeared.

"Human," Spock said. "The noble captain," Crandall said with obvious

sarcasm. Spock's own image replaced the captain's. "Vulcan," he said.

"The captain's loyal and logical first toady," Cran-dall said. McCoy and

Scott appeared in rapid succession, remaining on the screen only long

enough for Spock to pronounce them human and Crandall to provide

derisive comments. Then Crandall's image took shape, and Crandall

laughed sharply. "The prisoner!" he said, his words overlapping Spock's

repeated, "Human." Meanwhile, even as the series of images and

Crandall's illogical remarks had occupied one small segment

of Spock's consciousness, the greater part of the Vulcan's mind had been

reaching out in an attempt to strengthen the ephemeral bridge that had

seemed to exist between himself and the Aragos woman from the moment

their eyes had met. Even with that initial link, however, he knew that

anything deep enough to be meaningful would be difficult without

physical contact. He had occasionally achieved such contact in the past,

as when he and the captain and several others had been taken prisoner on

Eminiar VII. At that time he had been able to influence the guard

outside the room in which they were being held, but the actions he had

induced the guard to take had been simple and not far removed from his

assigned duties. A touch of initial mental confusion, an impression that

all was not as it should have been within the room he was guarding, a

slight damping of the wariness that went with the guard's natural

curiosity were all that had been required. His disruptor drawn but his

watchfulness and caution blunted, the man had entered the room and had

been instantly subdued. Here, however, it would take much more. It would

not be a matter of simply making one of the Aragos step closer to him.

Unless he could also force them to release him from the restraining

field, he could take no physical action himself. When and if the

translator again appeared in the transporter, the woman would have to be

prompted to take it from the transporter and turn it on. And leave it

on, not just for a few moments but possibly for hours. But even then,

the plan might fail. Turning the translator on would automatically link

it to the Enterprise's computer, provided the Enterprise was within

range. If it were not, the limited capacity of the translator itself,

even with its ability to detect and map the Aragos's neuronic activity

as they spoke, would not allow it to build up a usable vocabulary in a

totally unknown language for hours, perhaps days.

The plan did, however, offer the best chance for success of any he had

been able to devise, so it was only logical to make an attempt. If it

did not work, he would try whatever then appeared to have the next best

chance of being successful. While that same small corner of his mind

continued to attend to naming the objects as they appeared on the

screen, another portion observed and recorded in detail every move the

two aliens made, every control they touched, both on the transporter and

on the device the woman held. At the same time, Spock continued to reach

out mentally. In an attempt to compensate for the lack of actual

physical contact, he visualized his hands reaching toward her, their

immaterial fingers splayed out and bent as they would be if he were

actually touching her. At his sides, his own hands assumed the same

position, their raised tendons the only visible sign of the strain he

was undergoing. Slowly, the visualization became more real, until it was

almost as if his hands were physically there, coming together to cup the

woman's head between them. He could not only see them but feel them,

feel the physical texture of her dark, smooth skin, the whispering touch

of her hair where the tips of his fingers reached beyond the hairline

above her temples and pressed against the warmth of her scalp. And the

link itself became stronger, as if she, too, were reaching out,

unconsciously grasping for his mind, pulling it toward her own. For a

moment, her eyes flickered toward him, and he felt fear surge through

her, as if she suspected what was happening and distrusted it. Instead

of withdrawing, he tightened the link, forcing his own innercalmness and

rationality on her mind like a warm, comforting blanket on a shivering

child. And as he did, as the link solidified even more, he felt

something else. Distant and faint at first, it was touching not Spock's

mind but the woman's, but through her, he experienced it. She herself,

he realized, was not aware of it,

but it was there, and as he probed, he began to understand her lack of

awareness. Unlike his own mind, this other was not an independent,

questing intelligence, reaching out to touch and grip her mind. Instead,

it was something that had been there for a long period of time. It was

virtually a part of her, so intimate was its link to her mind. But it

was also somehow lifeless, artificial, similar in a way to a computer

but more nearly alive. Perhaps, Spock thought, it was similar to Nomad,

a freak cross between machine and organic intelligence, or perhaps even

the organic computer that he had first suspected of being the source of

the anomalous life form readings detected on this planet. And with the

thought came confirmation. Not the confirmation of an actual reply, but

a confirmation born of his own logical analysis of the seemingly

countless inputs he was receiving and had received. The pattern of the

original sensor readings suddenly made sense. They had reflected, he now

realized, both the organic heart of the computer and the hundreds of

living beings over whose sleeping minds and frozen bodies it watched.

Both had been linked so closely together---even more closely than they

were now--that the readings had been inseparable and hence impossible to

analyze individually. But that in itself was only logical. In order to

care for hundreds of living beings whose life processes had been slowed

so drastically that they could survive not just hundreds but thousands,

even tens of thousands of years, the system that monitored them and

cared for them would have to be intimately linked to them, not only to

their physical bodies but to their minds, for the minds would require as

much care as the bodies. The caretaker would have to be, in effect,

virtually an extension of those individual minds. And so it had been.

And now, through the woman, Spock suddenly found himself in contact, not

only with the organic

heart of the computer but with the hundreds of others of her race. In

the instant that he fully comprehended its nature, the barriers fell and

he found himself face to face with a thousand-headed Hydra, each head

with its own memories and dreams and hates and terrors. In the instant

full contact was made, a torrent of impressions and emotions descended

on him, overwhelming even his capacity to observe and analyze, his

ability even to remain aloof and unentangled. But there was still more.

What Spock had intended to be a mind touch was, suddenly, through the

power of what he had contacted, verging on a full-fledged mind fusion,

not with a single mind but with hundreds. And not only with the Aragos,

still unconsciously linked as they were through the organic computer,

but also with the crew of the Enterprise, each and every one. The thing

that Spock had initiated had taken on a life of its own. Like the

process that can instantly freeze an entire container of supercooled

water when a grain of sand is dropped in to act as a "seed," it reached

out and absorbed every mind, every memory within reach. From the captain

and McCoy, it took the shared agony that had wrenched at them as, to

safeguard their entire world, they had been forced to stand helplessly

by and watch Edith Keeler's brutal death under the wheels of a speeding

car back in the Depression-era United States. And from their days on

Yonada, it drew more shared suffering, this time mixed with the

bittersweet joy that came when McCoy himself, though miraculously

reprieved from his own self-diagnosed terminal illness, was forced to

part from Natira, the woman for whom he had been prepared to forsake his

last days on the Enterprise. From the captain himself radiated the

unsharable elation he had felt when he first realized he was about to

achieve his life's ambition of commanding a starship, but mixed with

that elation was the later pain not

only of Edith Keeler's death but that of his brother on Deneva and the

deaths of dozens of friends and crewmen under his command over the

years. And from Spock's own depths emerged the personal hell he had

experienced at his first sight of the paralyzed remains of his one-time

commander and lifelong friend, Fleet Captain Christopher Pike, a hell

that had forced him, logically and inevitably, into mutiny against

Starfleet itself. These and thousands--millions--of other images and

memories and emotions flooded over Spock, threatening to absorb him,

threatening to take his mind and, in the fusion, dilute it and weaken it

like a drop of blood being dissolved in an ocean of water. Desperately,

yet with an icy methodicalness, Spock tried to pull away. The first link

in the chain was that between himself and the woman with him in the

alien transporter room. If the fusion was to be overcome, that was the

link that had to be broken. Even in the midst of this mind-wrenching

turmoil, Spock realized that it was the combination of his own Vulcan

telepathic ability and the ability of the organic computer to monitor

its charges that enabled this all-encompassing fusion to exist. If the

link to either was broken, the fusion would dissolve. The other links

would decay to their normal strength or go out of existence altogether.

Mustering all the mental strength he could summon, Spock pulled back,

struggling against the vortex that held him. In his mind's eye, he once

again visualized his hands gripping the woman's head, realizing with

fascination that his fingers seemed to have actually penetrated her

skull. Slowly, finger by finger, he loosened his grip, withdrawing the

immaterial but painfully real-seeming fingers from her skull, pulling

them backward, seeing her flesh and hair reform in their wake. Then the

hands were no longer touching even that, but were cupped in the air

about her head, but still the vortex swirled about him, sucked at his

imagined hands like the vacuum of space sucked air from a punctured

ship.

But then, suddenly, the link was broken. His imagined hands did not

withdraw but simply vanished, as if all resistance to his efforts to

pull back had been instantaneously removed. At the same moment, the

raging tide of other minds receded. The hundreds of Aragos and their

thousands of years of dreams and nightmares, the crew of the Enterprise

and their countless joys and terrors, all were gone in the instant the

one single link snapped, allowing Spock's mind to recoil with all the

tremendous force he had been using to break that link. All were gone.

Except-- In the sudden silence and isolation, there was a scream, and as

that part of his mind that had been trapped in the maelstrom of the

fusion emerged and reunited with that small portion that, through it

all, had somehow continued to observe his true physical surroundings,

Spock realized that the scream had been going on for several seconds,

that it was, in all probability, the reason for the sudden breaking of

the link. It was Crandall. But even as that information imprinted itself

in his once again fully integrated mind, he saw the Aragos moving. The

woman dropped the tricorderlike device and lurched backwards, away from

the transporter platform, a look of terror on her face. The man, Spock

now realized, had himself been rigidly immobilized by the effect of the

fusion, but now he had a similar look on his face and was bringing his

hands back to the transporter controls, preparing to banish Spock and

Crandall back to their cavernous prison. And in that instant of

observation, a new plan sprang into being in Spock's mind. It was a plan

that had little chance of success. And even if it did succeed, there was

even less chance that either he or Dr. Crandall would survive to share

in its success. It was, however, the only plan that, so far as Spock

was aware, had any chance at all. He would spare Crandall if he were

able, but he saw no way in which it could be done. With further

analysis, it might be possible, but there was barely time to act,

certainly no time for additional observations and deductions. In any

event, neither his own life nor Crandall's could be considered

significant when weighed against the possible salvation of the

Enterprise and its four-hundred-odd officers and crew. Without

hesitation, he reached out with his mind. In the aftermath of the

chaotic and momentary fusion, the barriers were still low, the

resistance almost nonexistent. It was as if he were actually in physical

contact with the man at the transporter controls, so quickly was the

mental contact established. In the same instant, however, Spock felt the

other, the organic core of the computer and the hundreds of minds it

still touched. It, too, was reaching out, blindly trying to reestablish

its links to those hundreds of new minds that had been snatched from it.

But this time Spock was prepared, and he concentrated solely on the man,

excluding all else. Unlike the first time, when his own curiosity had

helped open the doors that had allowed the fusion, he resisted all other

influences, all other probings. Instead of an image of hands grasping

the other's face and head, there formed almost automatically in Spock's

mind the image of a wall shutting the two of them in, the rest of the

universe out. And his task this time was immeasurably easier than what

he had set for himself before. Instead of a series of actions, all of

which would have gone directly against both the woman's logic and her

instincts, he needed this time only to divert the man's attention, to

cause one move out of a half-dozen he would make, all in panic-driven

haste, to be in error. If, that is, he could trust the accuracy of the

memories supplied by that portion of his mind that had observed the

man's actions as he had transported item after item to and from the

third transport unit. And if Spock's own hurried analysis of those

actions, of the' functions of the switches and dials, were correct. But

there was no time for doubts, no time for further Observation or

analysis. Already the man's fingers were darting across the controls,

and within a second-- Concentrating so intensely he could almost see the

controls as if through the eyes of the operator, Spock willed the man's

fingers to an even more rapid pace, all the while centering his thoughts

on the one, critical switch. For an instant, just an instant, the man's

fingers hesitated, as if he, like the woman before him, had become aware

of Spock's intrusion, and the man's eyes blinked. But in the wake of the

massive intrusion of only moments before, the man could be sure of

nothing, and the new suspicion only increased his haste as he resumed

his movements. And the switch was thrown. The switch that, Spock

believed, controlled the destination to which he would be transported,

was thrown. Not daring to withdraw for fear that the man would, even

under these conditions, notice his mistake, Spock could only wait and

try to maintain the wall that separated him from the distressing chaos

of another uncontrolled fusion. He could only wait and watch as

Crandall's transport unit energized seconds before his own and the man

dissolved into swirling smoke. Finally, after a half-dozen seconds that

seemed to Spock's tension-heightened awareness like twice that number of

minutes, he felt the tingling chill of the transporter grip him. Filling

his lungs with a last intake of breath, narrowing his eyes to slits to

give them as much protection as possible, he blocked his mind against

the pain he knew was coming and watched the transporter room fade from

around him. An instant later--though he knew that in reality the

transport process took several seconds--his body felt

as if it were about to explode as the vacuum took him in its grip.

Beyond the barrier, apparently only inches away, dozens of faces turned

toward him, their eyes widening in shock, their mouths opening in

soundless shouts. Ignoring the sharp prickling in his ears, the only

portion of the pain his mind had yet allowed to reach his consciousness,

Spock turned from the barrier. He had, as he had hoped, materialized

outside the barrier, but he was a good fifty feet from the array of

Enterprise equipment, fifty feet from the translator he needed to snare

from its invisible support and throw through the barrier to the captain.

Both humans and Vulcans had survived for brief periods of total exposure

to a vacuum, but whether either could function usefully for more than

fractions of a second was unknown. Would the blood vessels in his eyes

rupture, blinding him? How long could he withstand the sudden unbearable

pressure of the air of that last deep breath before he was forced to

release it, letting the vacuum in to tear directly at his lungs? How

long could he block out the violently cramping pains imposed on every

joint by the sudden reduction of external pressure? Even for a Vulcan

with a full complement of mental and physical disciplines, to function

under such conditions for more than a few seconds would not be easy. And

as he completed the turn away from the barrier, he saw that the task

would be even more difficult than he had imagined. Standing virtually in

the midst of the Enterprise's equipment, blood trickling from his ears,

a set of survival gear already on his face, was Dr. Crandall.

Chapter Twenty

LITTLE MORE THAN tWO hours ago, Dr. Jason Crandall's world had once more

been turned upside down. One moment he had been lying in despair in an

Enterprise detention cell, reliving again and again his bungled attempt

to keep the deflectors from being raised, knowing that it had

undoubtedly been his final chance to achieve any kind of victory over

Kirk and his hateful disciples. The next moment, he found himself

snatched from the cell and dumped in the midst of what appeared at first

to be nothing more than a vastly larger cell. But this one, he realized

in an almost instantaneous burst of elation, looked as if it contained

not just himself but every single person who had been on board the

Enterprise. No longer was he the only prisoner, the only one helpless to

do anything but bemoan his fate! Now, suddenly, his enemies were

prisoners as well! They were all prisoners, he no more helpless than any

of the others, even that insufferable captain! Even if he was never able

to gain the victory he had hoped for by destroying the Enterprise, he

could at least no longer be defeated. He could still be killed--probably

would be killed---but he could not be defeated, not by death! He could

now die gladly, secure in the knowledge that Kirk and his four hundred

sycophants were no better off than he himself. Their precious starship,

their exclusive spacegoing fraternity, their vaunted loyalty to each

other--in the position they were now in, none of it meant a thing!

It no longer mattered, Crandall told himself with something that

bordered on glee, that the Enterprise had somehow saved itself from the

Hoshan and Zeator lasers for which he had attempted to lower the

deflectors. It no longer mattered that he was helpless. The others were

equally as helpless as he, and for two hours he had reveled in that

knowledge, enjoying the anger and frustration and fear he saw in the

faces around him. Even the attack on him, so quickly stopped by Kirk for

whatever his perverted reasons, had only added to Crandall's manic

enthusiasm, proving as it did that they credited him wi th at least some

of the responsibility for their downfall. But then, snatched away to

that dimly lit transporter room, as he had elatedly watched the total

helplessness of even the supposedly superhuman Vulcan, something

happened that made all the previous upheavals in his life fade into

nothingness by comparison. In less than a minute, his mind, his entire

life, was literally turned inside out. In one eternity-long minute,

everything changed. He had often undergone changes before, not only in

his evaluation of the world around him but in his evaluation of himself,

but never had he experienced anything like this. His mind suddenly lost

all its barriers, all its privacy, and the thoughts and feelings of

hundreds of others came pouring in, filling his mind as if it were their

own, overwhelming and absorbing and blending with his own memories and

emotions. And, to his utter amazement, he found himself experiencing not

revulsion or hatred or even fear, but understanding. And then, an

instant later, an overwhelming shame. Through a hundred different pairs

of eyes, he saw what others saw. Through a hundred different minds, he

felt what others felt. He saw Captain Kirk's early efforts to befriend

him,

to make him feel welcome in spite of his own hostility and overbearing

demands. He saw the remnants of Ensign Davis's admiration for what she

thought he had been, her sorrow at what she saw as his irrationality,

his betrayals. He saw the hundreds of honest smiles that officers and

crew alike had, despite his lack of response, bestowed on him, smiles he

had interpreted as a sarcastic surface, concealing only contempt. But

most of all, from hundreds of different viewpoints, he saw--himself. And

he cringed. He had been wrong. Virtually every thought and every motive

he had attributed to the officers and crew of the Enterprise had been

wrong, painfully and shamefully wrong. Under impossible circumstances,

they had tried their best to understand and help him, and he had, at

every turn, done his best to destroy them. Had his whole life been lived

the same way? Had his brother, all those long years ago, truly meant to

help him, not, as he had assumed, trick him into making a fool of

himself in front of the class? Had that negotiator on Tajarhi--Crandall

couldn't even remember his name now--been sincere in that

out-of-channels, late-night warning? Had the resultant disaster, the

loss of life and all the rest, actually been Crandall's fault? Had his

distrust of the man, his assumption that the call was part of a

desperate, last-minute scheme to win a better settlement, been the true

cause? Had his whole life been, as these weeks on the Enterprise had

been, a series of disastrous misunderstandings, all growing out of his

own egocentric--and horribly wrong!--imaginings? Had he, in assigning to

others the motives he himself was driven by, ruined not only his own

life but the lives of countless others? The only possible answer, the

answer he saw in the suffocating torrent of revelations that had

descended upon him, was a soul-rending YES!

But now-- Now, in the final moments of his life, he had one last chance

to redeem himself. Even as his transport unit had begun to operate, he

realized that he knew what the Vulcan hoped to do. The Vulcan's

thoughts, not in words but in images, had leaped into his suddenly

receptive mind, and he knew what was going to happen. As, too late, he

tried to suck in a final breath, he felt the transporter take hold, and,

suddenly, he was in the vacuum virtually in the middle of the array of

Enterprise equipment. For an instant it was as if every nerve in his

body had gone dead, and in that instant, before he felt his lungs begin

to burst, his joints to cramp, he saw and grasped the survival gear that

hung only inches in front of him. But a translator--a translator was

what he needed! As he lifted the survival gear to his face, as his

entire body erupted in an explosion of pain, he saw Spock. The Vulcan

had appeared next to the barrier, and already he was moving toward

Crandall. But he wouldn't make it. Even a Vulcan could not do miracles.

For an instant, the old Jason Crandall surged up inside him, and

pleasure flared through him at Spock's helplessness. But it was gone as

quickly as it had come, buried not only by the volcanic pain in every

part of his body but, more completely, by a renewed wave of shame.

Abruptly, not giving himself a chance to think, he forced his violently

cramping muscles to obey one last command and rip the survival gear from

his face and, with a gut-wrenching effort he wouldn't have thought

possible only seconds before, throw it through the deadly vacuum to the

Vulcan. As Spock, himself moving in a series almost of twitches, caught

it, Crandall, all control gone, felt the air that remained being ripped

from his lungs, felt his joints freeze in agony, his body begin to

topple.

His last, pain-shrouded sight was Spock slipping on the survival gear

and lurching toward him.

Somehow, Spock caught the survival gear and instantly fastened it over

his face. Instinct cried out for him to simply suck in the life-giving

air, but he knew he did not have the time. The gear was not intended for

use in a vacuum, only in hostile atmospheres on planetary surfaces, and,

while it would give him air to breathe, it would do nothing for the

violent, cramping pains that would, he knew, render him helpless the

moment the barriers his mind had set up crumbled. And, of equally

immediate concern, the operator of the transporter might discover his

mistake any second, and that would be the end of Spock's chance to reach

a translator. At least, he thought as he hobbled forward, there is no

barrier around the equipment, as they had feared there might be.

Crandall had proven that. Those in charge undoubtedly considered the

vacuum and the barrier around the prisoners sufficient protection. As

Spock moved, his slitted eyes scanned the equipment, but it was only as

he was passing Crandall's crumpled, bleeding body that he located a

translator. Lurching to one side, he grasped it from its invisible

shelf. Turning, seeing the captain and Dr. McCoy and Mr. Scott pressing

against the barrier, he raised his arm to throw. But even as he did, he

realized it was too late. Without the preliminary clammy tingle--had it,

too, been blocked from his mind along with the havoc being wreaked upon

his body by the vaccum?the momentary paralysis of the transporter-beam

lock-on gripped him. And he was back in the alien transporter room. The

shock of the sudden return of normal air pressure hit him almost as hard

as had its removal less than a minute before, but the instant he could

move, he

flicked on the translator, grimacing mentally as the faint pulsing light

that indicated the Enterprise's computer was out of range came on. A

moment later, as the sound of the Aragos voices came to him, he realized

with some slight relief that, while his ears were badly plugged, the

eardrums had not burst. He also realized that, if the field he was

embedded in had not held him upright, he would have fallen. On the

second transport unit, the collapsed form of Dr. Crandall, blood now

running freely from nose and ears and even eyes, took shape. Unable even

to lower his arm, so tightly did the field grip him, Spock waited

helplessly, expecting the woman to step up and take the translator and

the survival gear from him or the man to do something with his

transporter controls that would send the two items back to join the rest

of the Enterprise's equipment. But the woman did not move toward him.

Nor did the man do anything to the transporter controls, though his

fingers hovered closely over them. The woman, now standing next to the

man, was talking to him, gesturing angrily. Suddenly, to Spock's

amazement, the translator began speaking. "It is not a weapon!" it said,

apparently translating the woman's words. "Did you not see it in his

thoughts?" It was, of course, impossible, but it was happening. It took

hours or days for the translator, isolated from the main computer on the

Enterprise, to analyze a new language. The language, therefore, was not

new. It was one already in the translator's own memory. The Aragos,

thereforera And he remembered. Even as the blocks he had established

against the pain began to dissolve and his mind threatened to retreat

into oblivion before the assault, the reason for the nagging familiarity

of the name and for the performance of the translator came to him.

Aragos was the name of one of dozens of races---planetbound humanoid

races---discovered by earlier expeditions into the Sagittarius arm of

the Milky Way galaxy, where the gate had been. As with most planets that

did not have space travel, particularly those at such great distances,

there had been no contact beyond the gathering of data, including

languages. Distance and the Federation's noninterference policy

virtually forbade anything more. But here, countless light-years from

that planet, was incontrovertible evidence that, at some unknown time in

the past, this particular race had had not just space travel but

interstellar travel. They had found the gate, and they had passed

through it. But those thoughts flashed through Spock's besieged mind in

an instant, and almost before the translator's last words faded, he was

forcing himself to call out to the Aragos. "She is right!" he said, the

words slurred from the strain and from the effects of the vacuum on his

throat and tongue and lips. "It is a translator, to allow us to speak

with each other!" Virtually simultaneously, the alien words issued from

the translator. The woman fell silent, spinning to face him. The man's

jaw dropped as his eyes darted to the translator. "We mean no harm,"

Spock said, "as I know now that you mean none to us. We need your help,

as I suspec t you need ours." The woman's eyes widened as the translation

came, but then, abruptly, she turned to the man. "Release them!" she

said. The man hesitated, his eyes darting from the woman to Spock and

back, but then his fingers moved across the controls. A moment later,

deprived of the support of the restraining field, Spock crumpled,

unconscious, to the floor.

Chapter Twenty-One

"DATA TRANSFER TO auxiliary memory complete, Captain." Spock, a

greenish-red tinge to his eyes and an odd raspiness in his voice the

only outward signs that remained of his ordeal after Dr. McCoy's hurried

and harried ministrations, tapped a final code into the science station

controls as he spoke. Standing by the padded handrail behind Spock, the

leader of the Aragos--Ckeita, the woman from the transporter

room--watched, as interested in the Vulcan's apparent recuperative

powers as in the Enterprise's equipment. Below on the engineering deck,

a half-dozen of her scientists and technicians were working with Scotty

to jury-rig the modifications that would enable the sensors to pinpoint

the location of the gate. "Analysis for relevant information underway,"

Spock said a moment later. "We will soon know if the pattern for the

gate's behavior can be extrapolated to the present time with sufficient

precision. "Excellent, Mr. Spock," Kirk said, "but how soon is soon?"

"Impossible to make a reliable estimate, Captain. There are thousands of

years of data to be sifted and analyzed." "Understood, Mr. Spock. Just

see that it's completed before the Hoshan and Zeator are able to cut us

off from the gate." "I will do what I can, Captain," Spock said. "I must

point out, however, that they may well possess far more ships than the

ones we have already encountered. If so, such additional ships may

already have been deployed in the area of the gate, the approximate

location of which we had supplied to both parties." "I know," Kirk said,

grimacing as he looked away and then punched the button that activated

the engineering deck intercom. "Progress, Mr. Scott?" "Aye, Captain. Wi'

those six down here, I dinna think Starfleet will recognize the sensor

circuits when we get back, but if what they're doing does get us back,

I'll no' complain." "And the dilithium they supplied us with? Is it

compatible with our own?" "Aye, it can be used to replace our own

crystals, but we would have only impulse power while the replacement was

being carried out. And new dilithium crystals will do no' a thing for

the damaged deflectors. Those still need several days for a complete

overhaul of the generators." "What you're saying, then, Scotty, is that

we're better off sticking with the damaged crystals and hoping for the

best?" "Aye, Captain, unless ye want to take the chance o' being dead in

the water for more than a standard day." "All right, Mr. Scott, so be

it. Be prepared to replace them the moment we're safely through the

gate. We'd be years from the Federation without them. Mr. Sulu, take us

to the gate, maximum warp that's consistent with the condition of our

crystals." "Aye-aye, sir." "And Scotty, how are the life support systems

holding up under the demands of our nine-hundred-odd hitchhikers?". "The

air might get a wee bit thin in a few months, but there'll be no

problems before." "If we're all still on the Enterprise then, that will

be the least of our problems." Kirk paused just long enough to activate

the sick bay intercom. "Bones, what's the prognosis for Crandall? Will

he make it?"

"If we can get him to a starbase hospital, he will," McCoy's voice

grated from the speakers, "but otherwise it's doubtful. He's on full

support, and that will keep him alive, but he needs too many new parts

for me to reassemble him here. And tell Spock--again that I want him

back down here in no more than one hour! No matter how tough his Vulcan

hide is, I want to keep very close tabs on all that chemical baling wire

I used to keep his numerous loose parts from falling off." "All right,

Bones. Now, "Thirty ships have just come into sensor range, Captain,"

Chekov broke in. "They are both Hoshan and Zeator, and they are not

fighting with each other." "Heading?" "They are moving directly toward

the planet we just visited ourselves, sir. They must be following our

original course." "On our present course, will we come within their

sensor range?" "No, sir." "Steady as she goes, then, Mr. Sulu." Ckeita

looked around. "Are these the ships of the ones who destroyed these

worlds? The ones who attacked us and stranded us here?" Kirk shook his

head as the words emerged from the translator. "No," he said. "They've

only had inter-stellar flight a few hundred years." "Then who--" the

Aragos began. "I don't know," Kirk said, "but from what the Hoshan and

Zeator told us and from what you say happened to you more than five

thousand years ago, I'm beginning to have a theory. You said that, like

us, you came here through the gate at that time and were attacked

without warning?" "Five thousand years . . For a moment, Ckeita stood

perfectly still, her gaze focusing on something none of the others could

see. "That is the hardest fact of all to accept. To us, it is no more

than five years,

even less to those who were put under first and were not awakened for

any of the false alarms Shaking her head in a very human gesture, she

seemed to force that train of thought away. "What you say is correct,

Captain Kirk," she went on. "We were attacked with something very much

like your phasers. We were a scientific expedition, not a military one,

so all we could do was run. It was only sheer luck that the ones who

attacked us were themselves attacked, and further luck that the two were

evenly matched and totally destroyed each other." "Each other or

themselves," Kirk said. "If the ones you ran into are anything like the

current combatants, they may have simply disabled each other. Then, each

fearing what the other---or you--would do or learn if they were

captured, they may have done the final job of destruction, not on each

other but on themselves. Mutual suicide." The woman was silent a moment,

as if trying to remember. Then she nodded, not quite the human

up-and-down motion but a circular bobbing of her head. "I find such

actions difficult to credit, but little more difficult than the mindless

attacks they subjected us to. And it would, if true, explain why the

ships were destroyed some time after the battle appeared to be over. We

assumed some internal damage had been done during the battle, damage

that only after an interval resulted in the explosions of their

antimatter engines. But to purposely destroy themselves--" She shivered.

"You've explained how you avoided destruction by the two ships," Kirk

said, "but how did you end up where we found you? Or, more accurately,"

he added with a faint smile, "where you were when you found us. And how

your expedition came to be here at all, for that matter." "More luck, I

fear, Captain Kirk," she said with a grimace, "as was virtually

everything associated with our expedition. The gates themselves had been

discovered purely by accident."

"As we discovered them ourselves," Kirk said. Ckeita nodded, the same

almost circular bobbing motion she had used before. "Yes, they are the

product of a science far beyond yours or mine, Captain Kirk, so accident

is the only way those of our level could discover them. As you know,

however, once we were aware of their existence, we were able to devise

methods of locating them--and observing them in a limited way. We

studied the shorter-range ones for years, both those with surrounding

gravitational turbulence and those without. But we had only marginal

success in calculating the patterns they followed and a total failure to

learn anything at all about the one that brought us here, except that,

like the others, it varied in size and was, on average, by far the

smallest of the lot. From our fragmentary findings on the others, there

seemed to be an inverse relationship between a gate's size and the

distance it transported an object, so we assumed--guessed, really--that

the smallest one possessed a much greater range than the others.

"Finally, curiosity won out over caution, and a group of us committed

ourselves to a full-scale expedition to try to satisfy that curiosity.

We didn't know where it would take us, except that it would probably be

millions of parsecs from our homes. Nor did we have any guarantee that

we could return. Some of the shorter-range gates operated in both

directions, but not nearly all, and not with any consistency. It was

this possibility--probability, eventhat we would never return that

prompted us to make our expedition so large. If, as many of us

suspected, we found ourselves stranded in another galaxy or even another

time, we would be a large enough group to survive, even to colonize any

habitable worlds we were lucky enough to find. If we had suspected even

the possibility of the existence of the kind of madness we encountered-"

Ckeita broke off, shaking her head again. "Once we recovered from the

shock of the incredible density of the star population," she resumed,

"we began exploring.

But we found only dead worlds---devastated worlds, by the hundreds--and

soon we were ready to return to the gate. It might not return us to our

home, but it might at least let us escape whatever madness existed here.

"But we were too late. We had barely begun our return when the first

attack came. When it was over, even though all we had left was impulse

power, we fled. What else could we do? But then a third ship appeared

and began pursuing us. Fortunately, we were within sensor and

transporter range of the planet you found us on, and by the time the

attack finally came, our instruments had detected the artificial

caverns, the power sources, and the breathable atmosphere. Even a s our

ship was being destroyed, we transported ourselves down, along with

whatever equipment and material we had time for, including the dilithium

from the already useless warp-drive engines. Whoever was attacking us

apparently did not possess transporter technology, so they did not know

we were no longer in the ship when it was finally totally destroyed. "In

any event, we found ourselves in the retreat, much as it is today. Since

we were virtually all scientists and engineers, we were able to discover

the uses of some small portion of the retreat's contents, including the

suspended animation chambers and that part of the computer that

controlled them. And the transporters and sensors, as you know. They

were, again perhaps by luck, perhaps by scientific necessity, very

similar to our own, though far superior, so it was not as difficult as

you might imagine. "Nor was it that difficult to recognize and

understand much of the equipment we found set up in the caverns to

monitor the gates. It, too, was similar to ours, except that it was much

more advanced, apparently able to monitor not only the gate's activity

and size but its strength and several other characteristics we were

never able to fully understand. We even found that certain of the

monitoring equipment was linked to the computer's suspended animation

control

circuits, so that, whenever something came through the gate, someone

would be awakened. We had no idea why this was so, but it suited our

purposes as well as if it had been designed for us. If we were ever to

be rescued, it would have to be by our own people coming through the

gate, and this computer was already set to awaken us if that happened."

"So that was why you awakened not long after we came through," Kirk

said. "I didn't think it could be a coincidence." "No, not a

coincidence. Some of us have been awakened a half-dozen times in what

you tell me is the past five thousand years, but yours is the first

living ship. One derelict, completely alien but also completely useless,

its warp-drive engines dead for hundreds of years, came through two

hundred years ago. The other arrivals were all simply debris, rocks that

happened to drift through." Ckeita paused, glancing at the forward

viewscreen and then at Kirk again. "But you said you had a theory,

Captain. A theory to account for all this madness." He nodded. "One

that's already been at least partially borne out," he said, going on to

outline what the Hoshan and Zeator had said, that each had first entered

space peacefully only to be attacked blindly and ferociously by

unidentified ships that refused all attempts at communication. "It's

possible," he concluded, "that these attacks are only a small part of

what could be, literally, a millennia-spanning chain, including not just

the Hoshan and the Zeator but every race that's come out into space in

this sector in the past several thousand years. Each one is attacked and

each one, of course, retaliates, until, eventually, they reach the state

the Hoshan and the Zeator were in when we arrived. They trust no one,

and anyone who is unable to respond to their own specific recognition

code is automatically assumed to be the enemy and attacked without

warning, without mercy."

"But something had to start it, Captain Kirk. How could something so

terrible ever begin?" "I don't know about your people," Kirk said, "but

on my own planet, earth, there was a time when something very like it

would have been all too easy to start Even with constant communications

between nations, hardly a day went by for centuries when there wasn't a

war going on somewhere. In space, where fear of the unknown is always a

factor, and where communication between races just discovering each

other is difficult under the best of circumstances--" He shook his head

again. "No, at first I didn't want to admit it, even to myself, but the

more I've thought of it, the more I've realized that such a thing is

easily possible. All it would take would be one purely evil force to

start the chain reaction. Earth had its Hitlers. The Federation has the

Klingons. Or it could have started simply with a misunderstanding, the

way it almost did between the Federation and the Gorns. "But however

something like that starts, unless communications are somehow

established between the two factions, it can end only with the total

destruction of one side or the other. But with all of space for an enemy

to hide in, how could the victor be positive that his enemy's

destruction was total, that the enemy was truly gone? Were there

colonies that survived? Could there be fleets of enemy warships

returning from a conquest a thousand parsecs away? "So the supposed

victors, understandably paranoid after tens or hundreds or thousands of

years of seemingly mindless attacks, keep their defenses up, and one day

a new race ventures into their territory. Like you, like us, the

newcomers are attacked, their ships destroyed because the survivors of

that earlier war are unwilling---or unable--to take a chance that the

newcomers might not be their old enemy, either resurrected or

reincarnated." Ckeita shivered. "You paint a grim picture of your

species and your Federation, Captain Kirk, if you feel such things are

possible."

"Both have had their grim aspects, their grim times," Kirk said with the

faint beginnings of a smile, "but both on earth and in the Federation

there have always been a few people---enough, so far--who were willing

to take a chance, not for war but for peace. Like Spock back there in

your transporter room. He was ready to die for the chance of

establishing communications between us." Ckeita nodded, closing her eyes

for a moment. "You have spoken of your Federation," she said, opening

them and looking directly into Kirk's eyes, "and its enemies. But you

have not spoken of my people. I know that, after five thousand years,

their world would no longer be mine, but I would like to know--do the

Aragos still exist?" "They exist," Kirk said, exchanging a glance with

Spock, "but we know little of them. They no longer travel among the

stars, that we do know, but little else." "But you can take us there? To

their world? Our world?" "If we get back through the gate successfully,

yes, we could take you. Not immediately, but in time." "That is

understood, Captain Kirk." "I also imagine that the Federation would

establish a relationship with your world, perhaps help you learn what

happened to make your people retreat from space." "Yes, that is

something we would very much like to know. I cannot imagine that they

did it willingly. Not all Aragos were as curious or as adventurous as

those who volunteered for our expedition, but there was no lack of

either trait." "I'm sure there wasn't," Kirk said. "But if most of your

ships were geared for scientific exploration, with little or no

defenses---" "The Klingons you mentioned before, Captain Kirk?" "It's

possible, though we have seen no evidence of

them in your part of the galaxy. Unfortunately, however, others probably

exist who are equally as ruthless, and if one of them--" "Your theory

would appear to have further confirmation, Captain," Spock broke in,

looking up from the science station instruments. "The computer records

are even more extensive than I at first believed. They cover more than

forty thousand standard years, and they include the log of one who would

appear to be the computer's designer." "Fascinating, I'm sure," Kirk

said, "but the workings of the gate--" "Are of paramount importance. Of

course, Captain. The analysis is still underway." "Very well. Now, you

were saying? About the designer's log?" "To summarize, Captain, the

computer and the caverns that contained it were, as you suggested,

constructed by one of the races who, after moving peacefully out into

space, were attacked by unknown enemies. The world in question, however,

was not that race's home world. The home world's location is, of course,

not given, but it was at least a hundred parsecs distant, perhaps much

more." "Then why there? Why would they build their bunker there?" "Two

reasons, Captain. First, that world was one of their colony worlds, one

with the facilities to do the job. Though it is not specifically

indicated, it is possible that similar retreats--bunkers, if you prefer

that terminology--existed on other colony worlds, perhaps on the home

world as well. This one, however, was built not only as a retreat but as

a monitoring station, possibly a guard station, to observe the gate."

"The gate? Why did they want to guard the gate?" "Unfortunately, the log

does not contain specifics. However, it appears that they arrived at the

same theory concerning the attacks that you yourself suggested. In

addition, they apparently had reason to

believe that whoever initiated the chain of attacks had come through the

gate several thousand years before and had quite possibly retreated

through it rather than having been destroyed." Kirk nodded thoughtfully.

"If nothing else," he said, "this would explain why their transport

system was designed to be capable of snatching every living thing off an

approaching ship and separating them from their weapons and

communicators." "Affirmative, Captain. It is a most efficient method of

gaining control of any attacking ships. However, the fact that their

computer included the program the Aragos were using to attempt to learn

our language would indicate that the builders, like the Aragos, were

interested in establishing communications with their captives, not

simply imprisoning them and confiscating their ships." "But if they knew

all this," Ckeita said, "why could they not stop this chain of madness

you describe?" "Unknown," Spock said, obviously still feeling the

effects of the vacuum as he paused uncharacteristically to clear his

throat. "The log ends with the con struction of the computer and the

retreat. The builders' plans included continuous monitoring of all

aspects of the gate for an indefinite period as well as provisions for

placing all fifty thousand of that world's colonists into suspended

animation in case of attack. However, except for the activation of the

monitoring system, which was designed to awaken them whenever anything

came through the gate, none of those plans appears to have been carried

out. Or if they were, there was no record of them in the log, although

there may well be further relevant information that has not yet come to

light. The builders of the retreat may have been wiped out during the

attack that destroyed the planet's surface, or they may have retreated

to other of their worlds. If they were right about the original

attackers coming through the gate, their observational instruments may

even have brought the attackers back and led them to the planet before

the' people there were ready for them. Or they may simply have decided

they were wrong about the gate and abandoned the project. At this stage,

unless further information is located in the computer, there is no way

of knowing. We--and the Aragos--can only be grateful that the

instruments designed to observe the gate were activated before the end,

however that end may have come." Ckeita shivered again. "Had we known

all that you now tell us," she said, "I suspect we would have let the

final ship destroy us." Spock looked at her. "You took the only logical

course open to you," he said, and after a moment she nodded her

agreement.

Two hours later, Spock, his battered body reinforced by still more of

Dr. McCoy's "chemical baling wire," looked up sharply from his

instruments. "I have the pattern, Captain," he said. "With sufficient

precision, we will be able to utilize the gate." "Sufficient'

precision?" "The gate should be currently operating on a cycle of

approximately eight-point-six-nine-three hours. During that time, it

varies in size and destination continuously. Each transmitting window is

approximately seven-point-two seconds in length. During the window which

will allow us to return to our own galaxy, the gate itself will be

approximately point-seven-two-nine kilometer in diameter. It is

approximately this size for much of each cycle, which explains why we

were unsuccessful in our efforts to locate it before." "Less than one.

kilometer?" Kirk strode from the command chair to scowl over Spock's

shoulder at the readouts, then turned to Ckeita. "You said that before

you came through you had been able to monitor the size of the gate. Did

you know it could become this small?"

"We did not. We had not established any recurrent pattern in its

changes, nor could we measure its size with any precision. We knew only

where its center was and that its size appeared to vary continually. The

shorter-range ones, we are quite sure, were rarely less than several

thousand kilometers in diameter." "And the modifications your people are

making to our sensors will enable us to pinpoint the center of the gate?

Even when it is that small?" When Ckeita did not reply, Spock said, "The

modifications are based on the monitoring equipment found in the

caverns, Captain, and it is that monitoring equipment which has given us

the information to establish both the cycle and the size of the gate.

Simply locating the gate should therefore present no insurmountable

difficulty." "I don't suppose you've found anything that explains how

these things work?" "Not specifically, Captain. However, according to

readings taken by instruments the Enterprise unfortunately does not

possess, the gate's energy would appear to be constant. It would be

logical to assume that the more compressed that energy is--that is to

say, the smaller the gate at any given moment in its cycle--the farther

an object is transmitted. It could be considered analogous to a sun and

its gravity. When one is huge and diffuse, the gravity is comparatively

small, but when it contracts---" "I know, Spock," Kirk broke in. "It

becomes a neutron star and then a black hole, and the gravity is enough

to rip atoms to shreds. What I would really like to know is, when is our

window coming around next?" "In approximately five-point-two-four hours,

Captain. At our current warp factor, we will arrive in approximately

four-point-one-seven hours." "Which gives us slightly more than one hour

to spare," Kirk said. "Or to penetrate the perimeter the Hoshan and

Zeator may have established," Spock said, not looking up from his

instruments.

Once again, the Hoshan and Zeator commanders, Belzhrokaz and Endrakon,

shared the Enterprise's viewscreen. As Spock had feared, the nearly

day-long delay on the Aragos planet had enabled their combined fleet,

forty ships strong, to be waiting, spread out directly across the

Enterprise's path less than a million kilometers from the gate. At least

they had not opened fire the instant the Enterprise eased into their

sensor range. Neither, however, had they shown any indication of letting

the Enterprise pass without a battle. They had established

communications almost immediately and appeared to be willing to talk

virtually forever, although Kirk suspected this willingness was largely

to give the remaining thirty ships, already on their way from the Aragos

planet, time to arrive. "You speak of trust," Belzhrokaz was saying for

what must have been the hundredth time. "If you truly wish us to trust

you and believe this story you tell us of an enemy that was the source

of all our troubles many thousands of years ago, surrender your ship. If

everything is as you say, we will return it to you unharmed." "If

everything we have done so far hasn't convinced you that we mean you no

harm," Kirk said, unable any longer to totally suppress his irritation

at the Hoshan's repeated suggestion, "I can't imagine what would. As for

the beings who may have triggered at least four hundred centuries of

war, we have transmitted to you as much of the data as your computers

will handle, and we have given you the coordinates of the retreat. Even

without transporters to allow you direct access, your sensors will

confirm its existence, and your own computers will, with very few

improvements, be able to link up with the computer in the retreat." "All

very reasonable," Endrakon said, "but how

can we be positive that you yourself are not this enemy you speak of?.

How can we know that you have not simply manufactured all this data in

your own computer?" "The very fact that we didn't wipe you out when we

had the chance should be some indication!" Kirk snapped, his patience

suddenly reaching the breaking point. "Even now, the odds are excellent

that we can, if you force us, punch a very bloody hole right through the

middle of your fleet! That was, in fact, the recommendation of the

leader of the Aragos nearly an hour ago. They have been trapped here for

several thousand years and are understandably even more impatient than

we are!" Cutting off the sound to the two alien commanders, Kirk turned

sharply to Spock. "How much time?" "Five-point-seven minutes, Captain.

And the thirty ships that were following us to the Aragos planet have

just entered our sensor range. Based on their current course and

formation, they appear to be attempting to cut us off from any possible

retreat." Kirk shook his head in an angry grimace. "So it's now or

never. If we wait around for the next window, we'll be surrounded, and

with the deflectors and the dilithium crystals in the shape they're

in--" Restoring the sound, Kirk stood and faced the images of the two

commanders directly. "Thirty more of your ships have just been

detected," he said. "They are approaching us from the rear, apparently

in an attempt to surround us." Kirk paused, watching the two for any

sign of reaction, but there was none he could detect. "Very well," he

said, still facing them directly, "you leave us no choice. I will repeat

once more Everything we have said is true. We have demonstrated our

good faith again and again. We have taken a chance and trusted you,

apparently too often and too far. You have the evidence in your

computers. You have the testimony of Bolduc and Atragon and the others

who were aboard our ship. There's nothing more we can do to convince

you." Again he paused, and this time he saw a sideways flicker of

Belzhrokaz's eyes, as if someone were trying to get his attention. Kirk

waited another second, and when nothing further happened, he continued.

"We are coming through," he said flatly. "As we have demonstrated, our

weapons are easily capable of destroying your ships. Our deflectors,

unfortunately, are no longer capable of standing up to the kind of fire

we allowed you to direct at us before. Therefore, we have no choice but

to fire on any ship that attempts to fire at us. We will not fire,

however, unless we detect indications that you are about to fire.

Remember, our instruments can monitor your weapons. We will know which

ones are about to fire, and we will stop them from firing the only way

we are able--by destroying them and the ships in which they are

contained. We don't want to, but we will--unless you let us through.

It's up to you." Abruptly, he signaled to Lieutenant Uhura, who cut the

link, blanking the screen. A moment later, the dense star field in front

of them replaced the image of the two commanders. A half-dozen Hoshan

and Zeator ships--the ones closest to the course the Enterprise must

follow to the gate--were also scattered about the screen. "Ahead, Mr.

Sulu, impulse power, and keep that gate in your sights. All phasers,

lock onto targets closest to our path and prepare to fire on Mr. Spock's

command." More tense than he had ever been at the beginning of any

normal battle, Kirk settled back in the command chair, his darting eyes

fixing a lternately on Spock and the forward viewscreen, where the alien

ships' images grew larger with each second. Despite his confident words

to the alien commanders, he knew that the Enterprise's chances were not

good in any battle that might come. Even before they had first detected

the

waiting fleet, Scotty had told him that the dilithium crystals had been

pushed even closer to the ragged edge by their trip from the Aragos

planet. The drain caused by engaging the warp drive even one more time

could finish them altogether, and the deflectors were essentially

useless. A single burst by one of the aliens' brute-force lasers could

disable the Enterprise entirely, and with a dozen alien ships within

range and more approaching, it would be virtually impossible for the

phasers to take them all out in time to prevent them from firing. Ahead,

the ships continued closing in on the Enterprise's path. There were now

more than a dozen visible on the screen. "Time, Mr. Spock."

"Three-point-three minutes, Captain. At our present speed, we will enter

the gate two-point-five seconds into the window." For another fifteen

seconds, there was only silence. "Lasers activated on two ships,

Captain, but they are not beginning the buildup toward firing." "Hold

fire until they do, Mr. Sulu." "Threefive more, Captain. Closest

approach to enemy ships in eighty-three seconds. And all weapons on all

ships are now activated." "Be ready, Mr. Sulu." "Ready, sir. Phasers

locked onto nearest targets and programmed to shift to new targets after

minimum effective period of fire." "Captain," Uhura called loudly, "the

Hoshan commander is--both commanders are attempting to reestablish

contact." "Put them on the secondary screen." An instant later, the two

commanders appeared on the screen above the science station. This time,

neither was in the purposely neutral set from which they had spoken

before. Both were in what appeared to be the command centers of their

ships, and next to the Hoshan commander stood Bolduc.

"What is it?" Kirk snapped. "Have you decided to' opt for sanity and let

us through?" "Yes," the Hoshan commander began, but before he could say

more, Spock's still raspy voice cut in. "Laser on nearest Hoshan ship,

bearing one-zero-five; mark eighteen, initiating firing sequence,

Captain."

Chapter Twenty-Two

"MR. SULU," KIRK snapped, "you have your orders!" "No, wait!" the Hoshan

commander shouted, and an instant later he was snapping out desperate

orders of his own for the seemingly renegade ship to hold its fire. But

it was too late, except for Kirk to snap to Sulu, "Minimum burst, only

the one ship!" An instant later, less than a second before the laser

would have fired, the Enterprise's phasers lashed out, but only for an

instant. For another moment, there was total silence. Then Spock's

voice "No casualties, Captain, but self-destruct overload sequence has

been initiated." "No other ships preparing to fire?" "None, Captain."

"Belzhrokaz! Can the sequence be stopped?" Kirk shot at the Hoshan, but

the commander only shook his head despairingly as he continued to repeat

his own order not to fire. "Get your other ships out of range,

Commanders Kirk snapped. "Time, Mr. Spock!" "One-point-two-three minutes

to the gate, Captain. Twenty-seven seconds to terminal overload in the

Hoshan ship." "Transporter room! Get everyone off that ship! Now! Keep

them in the transporter matrix until we can arrange to have someone

waiting to deactivate their personal self-destruct devices." "Keptin!"

Chekov, his eyes wide, darted a look toward Kirk. "The gate will--"

"Will have to wait until next time, Mr. Chekov," Kirk said. "Transporter

room, are you--" "Locked on, sir!" came McPhee's voice. "Excellent! Get

them out of there!" "Already on their way, sir." "Warp speed, Mr. Sulu!"

The helmsman's darting fingers answered, and an instant later the

forward viewscreen was filled with the kaleidoscopic brilliance of the

relativistic starbow. Then, for just a moment, the computer-generated

image of the surrounding star field filled the screen, but within

seconds it shimmered, replaced once again by the sublight image. "The

crystals are gone, Captain!" Scotty's voice almost wailed from the

intercom. But they had lasted long enough. Behind them, the Hoshan ship

flared into a miniature nova, but the Enterprise was out of reach. "The

other ships--" Kirk began. "None seriously enough damaged by the

explosion to trigger a terminal overload sequence, Captain," Spock said.

"And the lasers on all other ships are being deactivated." Suddenly, as

if a flood valve had been opened somewhere inside him, the tension

drained out of Kirk, leaving him almost limp. "Thank you, Commanders,"

he said softly into the silence that had suddenly enveloped all the

ships, "for finally taking a chance on something besides more killing."

The next window was only minutes away. The Hoshan and Zeator ships, now

including the thirty that had come by way of the Aragos planet, watched

from a distance as Sulu once more began the approach.

"Will it last, sir?" Chekov asked over his shoulder. "Do you really

think they will not begin shooting at each other the minute we are gone?

There is an old Russian proverb---" "I know," Dr. McCoy said as he

continued to watch the viewscreen from his vantage point next to the

command chair. "When the cat's away, the mice will go back to war?"

"Mice, Dr. McCoy? The proverb has to do with a wolverine, but the idea

is perhaps the same. Keptin?" "I don't know, gentlemen," Kirk said,

still watching the screen with its nearly seventy ships hovering only

tens of thousands of kilometers away. "But even the six that we picked

off the disabled ship didn't seem too disturbed at finding out they were

still alive. And both commanders--" "Dr. McCoy." Nurse Chapel's voice

came over the bridge intercom. "Dr. Crandall appears to be regaining

consciousness." "What?" McCoy frowned as Kirk punched the button that

would allow him to answer. "Keep him under. In his condition, any

activity could make the damage even worse than it already is. I'll be

right down!" Turning, McCoy headed for the turbolift. "Just a second,

Bones," Kirk called, slipping out of the command chair and striding

toward the doctor. "What is it, Jim? I don't have all day. You heard--"

"I heard, Bones, I heard. I also heard a few things during that--that

whatever it was that Spock triggered back there on the Aragos planet.

Mentally heard a few things, that is, and 'felt' a lot more." "We all

did, Jim," McCoy said impatiently, "But you didn't happen to be looking

in the same direction I was a minute later, Bones. When Spock and

Crandall were transported into the vacuum, I was watching. I saw

Crandall. I saw what he did. I saw his face when he did it. And I felt

just a little of what had happened to him, of how he had been

changed---really changed--in the last sixty seconds." "And now you don't

have any doubts about him?"

McCoy said, a touch of sarcasm joining the impatience in his voice.

"Your captain's instinct'm" Kirk shook his head with a faint smile.

"This time my 'captain's instinct' is on his side." "If it's working

that well, then it should also tell you that; unless you let me go take

care of him, he won't survive long enough to ever find out how you feel

about him." "That is precisely what I'm afraid of, Bones, and I want to

do something to help the odds." "Keeping me standing here" McCoy began,

but Kirk continued, speaking rapidly. "You've always said that a

patient's state of mind, even when he's unconscious or in a coma, has a

lot to do with his recovery. So, what would happen if he were allowed to

regain consciousness for just a minute, just long enough, say, for you

to tell him something that would stick with him when he goes back under?

Something that might help him hang on until we can get him to a starbase

hospital? Even with the new dilithium crystals, it's going to be a long

haul." "All right, Jim, I'll thank him for saving us. Now if---" "Make

it something more concrete than that, something that'll be sure to

register. For instance, I've been thinking that the Aragos world back in

our own galaxy will be in line for an ambassador once the Federation has

established formal contact. Considering Crandall's experience---and the

change he's undergone--he's someone I could recommend for such a post."

Somehow, McCoy managed to scowl and smile at the same time. "I'll tell

him," he said. Turning to enter the turbolift, he added with a shake of

his head, "You know, Jim, there are times when I think my country doctor

routine has rubbed off on you. Now if you can just pass a little of it

on to Spock, you might--" The closing door cut off whatever else he was

going to say. "Two minutes to the gate, Captain," Spock said as Kirk

returned to the command chair.

"Captain," Lieutenant Uhura said sharply, "both commanders are trying to

reestablish contact." "Put them on the secondary screen, Lieutenant."

Abruptly, the Hoshan and Zeator commanders appeared, once again in their

respective control rooms. What, Kirk wondered, did they want now? They

had said their curt good-byes hours ago, when the rescued Hoshan had

been beamed aboard Belzhrokaz's ship. "We had to speak to you again,

Commander Kirk," Belzhrokaz said without preamble. "Neither of us can

guarantee that our own superiors will not overrule us, but do know this

We, Endrakon and myself and all those who now observe your departure,

will do our best to see that you will be given a better welcome when you

return." "If you return," Endrakon added, and in that moment Kirk saw in

the alien's slim, avian face a flash of the same guilt that had filled

Atragon's face when he had first been told that his people had for more

than a century been warring against a people who had, originally, been

as innocent as they th emselves had been when they had first been

attacked three centuries earlier. A moment later, something similar

darted across the Hoshan's face, settling in his deepest, shadowed eyes.

And in that moment, much of the doubt that Kirk had felt about this

uneasy alliance faded, and he smiled. "We'll be back," he said. "I'm

sure, now, that we'll be back someday." "Gate in ten seconds, Captain,"

Spock announced. Mentally counting down, Kirk watched not the forward

screen but the images of the alien commanders, themselves watching

wordlessly until, in a sudden flare of color not at all characteristic

of normal sub-space signal loss, the images vanished. Simultaneously,

the clouds of stars on the forward viewscreen flickered out and were

replaced by the comparative emptiness of the Sagittarius arm of the

Milky Way galaxy. The only sound, if sound it was,

was that of four-hundred-odd officers and crew and' nearly a thousand

Aragos suddenly relaxing. "Transition successful, Captain," Spock said.

"Excellent, Mr. Spock. Mr. Scott?" "Aye, Captain," Scott's voice came

immediately from the intercom, "the dilithium crystals. We're on it

already. And the deflectors." "Of course, Mr. Scott. I assumed you would

be." Pausing, Kirk turned toward Spock. "And now that we're safely home,

Mr. Spock, I would suggest you take the rest of the watch off, in fact,

the next two or three, and that, unless you have other plans, you let

Dr. McCoy check your baling wire again and see what can be done about

something more permanent." "I have no other plans," Spock said, for once

not protesting the suggestion that he rest for a time. "Thank you,

Captain." "No," Kirk said, more conscious than ever of the evidence of

the Vulcan's ordeal, the gravelly quality that still coated his voice

and the greenish-red tinge still visible in his eyes, "thank you, Mr.

Spock."